Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management Operator Manual
312401/B March 2009
Document history Document number: 312401 Rev. A
June 2007
First edition in Teamcenter. Replaces AD-00534. No changes to contents.
Rev. B
March 2009
Major revision. Refer to P&I BKJ01-2007/1530.
The reader
This Operator Manual describes how to use the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management controls and display facilities. It is intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of alarm and monitoring systems and have basic knowledge of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime training course.
Note The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg Maritime AS. Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.
Warning The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate or work on the equipment. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.
Comments
To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and constructive criticism. e-mail:
[email protected]
Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway
Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com
Operator Manual
Table of contents Admonitions ........................................................................................................... 11 Glossary..................................................................................................................12 Alarm list terms ......................................................................................................14 1 1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION .............................................................. 15 Purpose ...................................................................................................................15 Safety rules .............................................................................................................17
2 2.1 2.2 2.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................... 18 System overview ....................................................................................................18 K-Chief 500 system diagrams ................................................................................20 Design principles ....................................................................................................22 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3
2.4
Alarm system..........................................................................................................27 2.4.1
2.5
Stand-by pumps.......................................................................................... 41 Valve control ............................................................................................. 42 PID controllers .......................................................................................... 43 Compressor control .................................................................................... 43 Purifier control ........................................................................................... 43 Boiler control ............................................................................................ 44
System functions, Power Management System .....................................................45 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3
3 3.1
About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System................................................. 40 About bridge watch alarms .......................................................................... 40
System functions, Process Control System ............................................................41 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6
2.8
Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring.................................................. 30 Trend monitoring ........................................................................................ 30 Fuel performance system (optional) ............................................................. 30 Running hours and counters......................................................................... 31 Tank display ............................................................................................... 32 Engine monitoring ...................................................................................... 34
System functions, Bridge Watch Monitoring System ............................................40 2.6.1 2.6.2
2.7
Alarms ....................................................................................................... 27
System functions, Alarm and Monitoring System .................................................30 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6
2.6
System components .................................................................................... 22 Decentralized system architecture ................................................................ 23 Centralized operation .................................................................................. 25
Introduction................................................................................................ 45 Generator control functions ........................................................................ 46 Power management functions with shaft generator ....................................... 47
UNIT DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................... 50 Overview ................................................................................................................50
312401/B
3
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3.2
Operator Stations and Operator Panels ..................................................................51 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6
3.3
Watch Calling System ............................................................................................58 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4
3.4
Operator functions ...................................................................................... 77 Alarm and monitoring display ..................................................................... 77 Process mimics, bar graphs and status displays ............................................. 77 Logging and hard copy ............................................................................... 78 Self-checking and diagnostics...................................................................... 78 Access control ........................................................................................... 78
System images ........................................................................................................79 4.2.1 4.2.2
4
Gateway types ............................................................................................ 74 The System Gateway (SGW) ....................................................................... 74 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) .................................................... 75
USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 77 Overview ................................................................................................................77 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6
4.2
Main characteristics .................................................................................... 63 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) ................................................................ 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc).............................................................. 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a)...................................................... 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)............................................................... 66 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) ................................................................. 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) ................................................................... 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) ................................................................... 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) .................................................................... 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) ................................................ 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) ...................................................................... 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) ................................................... 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS).............................................................. 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) ............................................................ 73
Gateways ................................................................................................................74 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3
4 4.1
Purpose ...................................................................................................... 58 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature............................................................... 58 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) .......................................................................... 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) ........................................................................... 60
Distributed Processing Units ..................................................................................63 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.10 3.4.11 3.4.12 3.4.13 3.4.14
3.5
Operator Station (OS) ................................................................................. 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) ...................................................................... 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) ......................................................................... 53 Input Panel (INP)........................................................................................ 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC)..................................................................... 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) ......................................................................... 56
Display layout ............................................................................................ 79 Image types in the main window.................................................................. 79
312401/B
Operator Manual
4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10
Process image............................................................................................. 80 List image .................................................................................................. 80 Trend image ............................................................................................... 82 Monitoring image ....................................................................................... 83 System configuration image......................................................................... 84 PDF viewer ............................................................................................... 85 Navigator ................................................................................................... 86 How processes are displayed and controlled ................................................. 87
4.3
ShipViewer .............................................................................................................89
5 5.1 5.2
GETTING STARTED.......................................................... 90 Operator stations and panels...................................................................................90 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) ...................................................................91 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8
5.3
Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP)....................................................................95 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3
5.4
Understanding the ALC............................................................................... 97 ALARM group buttons and lamps ............................................................... 97 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 98 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 98 Background light ........................................................................................ 98 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 98 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 99
Using the Input Panel (INP) .................................................................................100 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5
5.6
Understanding the TCP ............................................................................... 95 Alarm Navigator......................................................................................... 95 Graphic Display Navigator .......................................................................... 96
Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) ..............................................................97 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7
5.5
Understanding the CRP ............................................................................... 91 ALARM group buttons and lamp ................................................................. 91 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 92 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 92 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................... 93 Trackball ................................................................................................... 94 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 94 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 94
Understanding the INP .............................................................................. 100 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................. 100 Trackball ................................................................................................. 101 Background light ...................................................................................... 102 Temperature sensor ................................................................................... 102
Using the Midi Operator Station ..........................................................................103 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3
312401/B
Range of use ............................................................................................ 103 Understanding the keyboard ...................................................................... 103 Understanding the display ......................................................................... 105
5
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5.6.4
5.7
Using the Watch Bridge Unit ...............................................................................107 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4
5.8
6.1 6.2
Explanation of controls and indicators.........................................................110 How to respond to alarms ...........................................................................112 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ..........................................113 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................113 How to test the panel..................................................................................113
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM......................................................................... 114 Overview .............................................................................................................. 114 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP)....................... 115 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.2.19 6.2.20 6.2.21 6.2.22 6.2.23 6.2.24 6.2.25 6.2.26 6.2.27
6
Explanation of controls and indicators........................................................ 107 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ......................................... 109 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................110 How to test the panel..................................................................................110
Using the Watch Cabin Unit................................................................................. 110 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5
6
Menus...................................................................................................... 106
How to handle alarm events........................................................................115 Navigator name definitions ........................................................................115 How alarms are printed after a black-out .....................................................116 How to acknowledge alarms .......................................................................116 How to display Alarm Summary .................................................................117 How to display alarm history ......................................................................119 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 120 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 121 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 121 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 122 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 122 Screen Saver............................................................................................. 124 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 125 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 126 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 127 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 132 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 133 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 134 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 135 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 136 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 137 How to display system information ............................................................ 137 Access control system ............................................................................... 138 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 145 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 145 How to change system time ....................................................................... 146 Info field .................................................................................................. 147
312401/B
Operator Manual
6.2.28 6.2.29 6.2.30 6.2.31 6.2.32 6.2.33 6.2.34 6.2.35 6.2.36 6.2.37 6.2.38 6.2.39 6.2.40 6.2.41
6.3
How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 147 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 147 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer........................................... 148 How to change tag parameters for a channel ............................................... 148 How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 152 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 155 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 155 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 156 How to call officers................................................................................... 157 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 159 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 159 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 160 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 162 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 176
OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP).......................180 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 6.3.18 6.3.19 6.3.20 6.3.21 6.3.22 6.3.23 6.3.24 6.3.25 6.3.26 6.3.27 6.3.28
312401/B
How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel ........................................ 180 How to display Alarm Summary ................................................................ 182 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 183 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 184 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 184 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 185 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 186 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 186 Screen saver ............................................................................................. 188 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 189 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 190 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 190 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 195 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 196 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 197 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 199 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 199 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 200 How to display system information ............................................................ 200 Access control system ............................................................................... 201 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 207 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 208 How to change system time ....................................................................... 209 Info field .................................................................................................. 210 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 210 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer............................................211 How to change tag parameters for a channel ................................................211
7
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.3.29 6.3.30 6.3.31 6.3.32 6.3.33 6.3.34 6.3.35 6.3.36 6.3.37 6.3.38
6.4
MOS operational procedures................................................................................242 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.4.9 6.4.10
6.5
7.1
8
Main ShipViewer functions ...................................................................... 255 Understanding the ShipViewer display ....................................................... 255 Explanation of ShipViewer displays ........................................................... 257 How to print displayed information............................................................ 260 How to save ShipViewer images ................................................................ 261 How to view saved mimic diagram files ..................................................... 261
ME monitoring operational procedures................................................................263 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3
7
How to receive a call................................................................................. 252 How to respond to alarms .......................................................................... 252 How to call the ON DUTY engineer .......................................................... 252 How to transfer watch responsibility .......................................................... 252 How to accept watch responsibility ............................................................ 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) ........... 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) ........... 253
ShipViewer operational procedures......................................................................255 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6
6.7
How to handle alarm events....................................................................... 242 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 242 How to display alarm summary.................................................................. 243 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 243 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration ....................................... 244 About password access.............................................................................. 245 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details ...................... 246 How to change tag parameters .................................................................. 247 How to change alarm limits ....................................................................... 251 How to change alarm delay ....................................................................... 251
Watch Calling system operational procedures .....................................................252 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7
6.6
How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 215 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 218 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 218 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 218 How to call officers................................................................................... 219 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 221 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 221 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 222 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 224 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 238
ME monitoring overview mimic ................................................................ 263 Bearing Wear............................................................................................ 263 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) .................................... 271
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM .................................................. 276 Overview ..............................................................................................................276
312401/B
Operator Manual
7.2
BWMS operational procedures ............................................................................276 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9
8 8.1 8.2 8.3
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM......................................................................... 283 Overview ..............................................................................................................283 About the Process Control System .......................................................................283 OS operational procedures ...................................................................................283 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5
8.4
9.1 9.2 9.3
How to operate a pump starter ................................................................... 283 How to operate a fan starter ....................................................................... 295 How to operate a compressor..................................................................... 299 How to operate valves ............................................................................... 309 How to operate a PID controller................................................................. 313
MOS operational procedures................................................................................316 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6
9
Normal use of the BWMS ......................................................................... 276 How to turn the system on/off ................................................................... 277 How to select backup navigator on duty .................................................... 278 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off ...................................................... 278 How to call for backup ............................................................................. 279 How to adjust system timers ..................................................................... 279 How to change between day and night viewing........................................... 280 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration ....................................... 280 How to change access level ....................................................................... 281
How to open Tag overview ........................................................................ 317 How to operate a pump starter ................................................................... 317 How to operate a fan starter ....................................................................... 327 How to operate a compressor..................................................................... 330 How to operate a valve.............................................................................. 340 How to operate a PID controller................................................................. 344
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................... 347 Overview ..............................................................................................................347 About the Power Management System ................................................................347 OS operational procedures ...................................................................................348 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8
312401/B
Overview ................................................................................................ 348 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP)........................................................................................................ 349 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP)........................................................................................................ 349 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control ................................. 349 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control ............................ 357 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint ................................................................................................... 359 How to operate the main switchboard controller ......................................... 360 How to operate a bus-tie breaker ............................................................... 363
9
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
9.3.9
9.4
MOS operational procedures................................................................................366 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6
10 10.1 10.2 10.3
How to operate the one-touch auto sequence .............................................. 364 User interface ........................................................................................... 366 How to operate the main switchboard controller ......................................... 367 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control ................................. 370 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control ............................ 379 How to operate a generator set without start/stop, but with adjustable load setpoint .................................................................................................... 381 How to operate a bus-tie breaker ............................................................... 382
REFERENCE GUIDE........................................................ 385 Overview ..............................................................................................................385 Tag types...............................................................................................................386 Alarm and monitoring parameters........................................................................389 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7
Analogue input tag items........................................................................... 389 Counter input tag items ............................................................................. 393 Digital input tag items ............................................................................... 396 Exhaust mean value tag items .................................................................... 397 Exhaust deviation tag items ....................................................................... 400 Common sub-menu items .......................................................................... 401 Alarm sub-menu items .............................................................................. 402
10.4 Engineer’s safety ..................................................................................................403 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.5
Purpose .................................................................................................... 403 Functions ................................................................................................. 403 Local control ............................................................................................ 403 Operator Station control ............................................................................ 403 Parameters ............................................................................................... 403
11 MAINTENANCE .............................................................. 405 11.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................405 11.2 Preventive maintenance........................................................................................406 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4
Maintenance schedule ............................................................................... 406 Weekly maintenance ................................................................................. 406 6–monthly maintenance ............................................................................ 407 Yearly maintenance................................................................................... 408
11.3 Corrective maintenance ........................................................................................409 11.4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) ......................................................................................410 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3
10
How to handle DPU error codes................................................................. 410 RIO-C3 7–segment display.........................................................................411 How to handle DPU communication errors................................................. 412
312401/B
Operator Manual
Admonitions The following admonitions found throughout this manual mark special messages to alert the user of specific information concerning of the personnel, the equipment or the process. WARNING Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this WARNING can result in bodily harm or loss of life and/or extensive damage to equipment. Caution Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this CAUTION can result in damage to equipment. Note
Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information or specific instructions pertinent to the immediate instruction.
312401/B
11
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Glossary ACK ALC AMS BIST BWMS CAN CCR CRP DG dPSC DPU ER ECR EMC EMD EMI ESD GND GUI IACS ID IEC IMO INP I/O KM LAN LCD LED MCT MOS NC NO OD OS
12
Acknowledge Alarm & Control Panel Alarm and Monitoring System Built In System Test Bridge Watch Monitoring System Controller Area Network Cargo Control Room Control Room Panel Diesel Generator Dual Process Segment Controller Distributed Processing Unit Engine Room Engine Control Room Electromagnetic Compatibility European union Maritime Directorate Electromagnetic Immunity Electrostatic Discharge Ground (module 0 V reference) Graphic User Interface International Association of Class Societies Inner Diameter International Electrotechnical Commission International Maritime Organisation Input Panel Input/Output Kongsberg Maritime Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Multi-cable Transit System Midi Operator Station Normally Closed Normally Open Outer Diameter Operator Station
312401/B
Operator Manual
PCS
Process Control System
PDO
Process Data Object
PDS
Process Data Segment
PE
Protective Earth
PEC
Parallel Earthing Conductor
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PMS
Power Management System
PS
Process Station
PSO
Power Switch Over Module
PSS
Process Segment Starcoupler Module
RAi
Remote Analogue Input Device
RAi TC
Remote Analogue Input Device for Thermo Couple
RAo
Remote Analogue Output Device
RDi
Remote Digital Input Device
RDo
Remote Digital Output Device
RIO
Remote I/O
SG
Shaft Generator
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair
TCP
Touch Control Panel
UMS
Unmanned Machinery Space
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB
Universal Serial Bus
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
VCC
Voltage Converter Controller
WBU
Watch Bridge Unit
WCU
Watch Cabin Unit
312401/B
13
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Alarm list terms Analogue sensors Grad
Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.
High
High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set limit.
Hi-Hi
High-High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set limit.
IFH
Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.
IFL
Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.
Inhib
Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms, such as when the main engine is stopped.
Low
Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit.
Lo-Lo
Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit.
Offsc
Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations and is not measured any more.
Digital sensors Broken
The wiring to the sensor has an open-circuit.
Closed
The switch is closed, such as “valve closed”.
Inhib
Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms, such as when the main engine is stopped.
Offsc
Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations.
Open
The switch is open, such as “valve open”.
Short
The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit.
14
312401/B
Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Purpose The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. The manual includes the following main chapters: • System description – This chapter presents a general introduction to the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. • Unit descriptions – This chapter presents a technical description of the K-Chief 500 system units. • User interface – This chapter presents all the elements of the user interface. • Getting started – This chapter explains how to use the basic control functions of the K-Chief 500 system. • Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Alarm and Monitoring System for all Operator Station types. • Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Bridge Watch Monitoring System. • Operational procedures, Process Control System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Process Control System for all Operator Station types. • Operational procedures, Power Management System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Power Management System for all Operator Station types. • Reference guide – This chapter contains parameter-related information accessible from the various operator locations.
312401/B
15
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Maintenance – This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. Note
The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Important
Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
16
312401/B
Introduction
1.2 Safety rules Note
Kongsberg Maritime’s health and safety system must be adhered to at all times. WARNING Fire If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated from burning insulation, printed circuit boards and similar. WARNING Health hazards Do not inhale dust when cleaning the interior of the system. The dust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment. Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable to damage due to static voltages. Observe all precautions for handling of semiconductive sensitive devices.
312401/B
17
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.1 System overview The K-Chief 500 is an Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements, covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination of the following: • Alarm and monitoring system • Auxiliary control system • Power management system • Cargo control system • Propulsion control • Ballast automation system • HVAC (air conditioning) • Anti-heeling • Reefer monitoring • Fire system • Main Engine monitoring system Note
This manual only describes the K-Chief 500 used as an Alarm and Monitoring System. Note
This manual describes the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime’s unified automation concept, where each individual ship configuration is built up using standard modules communicating on CAN and LAN networks. The K-Chief 500 is configurable for all ship types, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passenger vessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other special purpose vessels. The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all the basic alarms and status information they require in order to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other relevant equipment.
18
312401/B
System description
K-Chief 500 complies with the requirements of IMO, local maritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. It is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for periodically unmanned engine room operation. The system conforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are type approved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware and software technology. K-Chief 500 is also developed to strict military quality standards. Refer to Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker) on page 20 and Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker) on page 21 for a principal overview of the K-Chief 500 system. The K-Chief 500 system can be a stand-alone system, but it may also be interfaced with other systems. Examples of systems are shown in the list underneath. • K-Gauge – The K-Gauge is a cargo monitoring and control system which is a highly integrated system incorporating level gauging, temperature and pressure monitoring, valve and pump control. • K-log – The K-Log Electronic Logbooks are designed to replace the traditional paper logbooks. K-Log supports event based recording of data related to navigation, engine watch, port calls and other operational activities. • Auto Chief C20 – The Auto Chief C20 is a propulsion control system which can be adapted to various engines. • Main Engine monitoring system – The ME monitoring system monitoring the conditions of Main Engine; Bearing Wear alarm handling, Cylinder Liner temperature and detections of scuffing of piston wall, main bearing temperature, x-head bearing and crank bearing temperature, Torque measurements, Water In Oil Detection. The Main Engine monitoring is under constant development to meet the modern requirements of such a system. • FleetMaster – The FleetMaster enables continuous access to primary vessel data both on board the vessel and from ashore. • Voyage data recorder – The main purpose of our Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) the Maritime Black Box MBB® is to record and store relevant ship’s data and allow reconstruction of ship incidents at sea. • External VDR • Serial interface to external systems — for instance a fire system or a level gauging system.
312401/B
19
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.2 K-Chief 500 system diagrams Figure 1
Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker)
Accommodation
WCU
Wheelhouse
Engine Control Room
Printer
WBU WCU
WCU
OS
OS
WCU WCU WCU
OS
CRP 1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
WCU
Dual LAN Switch MSI12
Instrument driver
Serial line RS-422
DPU
CEG
CEG
Dual CAN
dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system
DPU
MOS
Rotating light and horn
MOS
MOS
dPSC
(vs060222f)
DPU
20
DPU
dPSC DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
8 DPU Cabinet
16 DPU Cabinet
DPU
DPU
DPU
16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC
PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB
Process Area
312401/B
System description
Figure 2
Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker)
Accommodation
Wheelhouse
WCU
Engine Control Room
Printer
WBU WCU
OS
WCU
Cargo Control Room
Printer OS
WCU
OS
OS
CRP
WCU
1 h9 p2 5
WCU
A u 1 2 t o
OS
OS
CRP 1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
1 h9 p2 5
A u 1 2 t o
WCU
Dual LAN Switch
Switch MSI12
MSI12
Instrument driver DPU
Serial line RS-422
Serial line RS-422
CEG
CEG
CEG
CEG
Dual CAN
Dual CAN
dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system
DPU
MOS
Rotating light and horn
Rotating light and horn
MOS
MOS
dPSC
dPSC
Routing of tags between Engine Room and Cargo segments
dPSC DPU
MOS
DPU
MOS
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
(vs060222i)
8 DPU Cabinet
312401/B
16 DPU Cabinet
16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC
DPU
PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB
dPSC
16 DPU Cabinet
Engine Room Process Area
DPU
16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC
Cargo Process Area
21
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.3 Design principles 2.3.1 System components The K-Chief 500 is a modular system that allows us to meet individual ship owner’s requirements using standard modules. The main building blocks of the K-Chief 500 are: • Operator Stations (OS) – Their main functions are to receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the system. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of the Watch Calling System and print various logs. They also enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for inspection of variables, remote operation of equipment adjustment of parameters etc. • Midi Operator Stations (MOS) – Their main functions are to allows alarm indication, process control and power management. The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. • Operator Panels (CRP/INP/ALC/TCP) – Their main functions are to act as status and command panels for the Operator Stations. They also include a keypad for entering number values into the system and/or a trackball for controlling cursor position on the Operator Station screen. • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and from the bridge. • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in the public quarters while in bridge control. • Distributed Processing Units (DPU) – Their main functions are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific control and monitoring applications.
22
312401/B
System description
• Dual redundant Local Area Network (LAN) – The LAN is used for communication between the Operator Stations and other PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to two completely separate Local Area Networks for maximum redundancy. • Dual redundant Controller Area Network (CAN) – The CAN is used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two completely separate CAN-buses for maximum redundancy. • Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is a dual two channel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels are working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The main function of the dPSC is to process messages from the a local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global process bus, where they are available for other dPSCs and System Gateways. • Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) – The PSS is used to segment the CAN-bus so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not affect the functions in the other segments. • System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW connects two CAN lines to two Local Area Network lines. The main purpose is to receive messages from the two process buses running CAN, and update the main Operator Station database. Different selections of these units are used to configure each individual system. K-Chief 500 is a fully microprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety and ease of installation, but operation is centralised using Operator Stations (OS).
2.3.2 Decentralized system architecture The heart of the K-Chief 500 system is the small family of different intelligent I/O units called Distributed Processing Units. These communicate with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. All monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the Distributed Processing Units, while the centralised Operator Stations provide the Man Machine Interface. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels. The number of channels varies from 8 to 32. To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit, the appropriate software and parameters are down-loaded to the unit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform
312401/B
23
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
alarm functions, some control functions, some safety functions or any combination of these. This makes it easy to separate automation system functions. The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units in the K-Chief 500 system is the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. For systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for other design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added to the CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregation of the automation system between for instance the different sections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gateways do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for locating operator stations. The K-Chief 500 is designed to accept both a “grounded” or a “floating” earth installation. The latter installation method is required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types. Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems and ground leakage detection. The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for immunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unit has an internal three-way galvanic isolation between power, communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails, this will not affect the power source, communication bus or damage the sensors. The Built In System Test (BIST) will detect the error and warn the operator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensors will also be detected by the Built In System Test. Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done without turning the power off the K-Chief 500. The procedure is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit, and then mount and reconnect a replacement. The operator then requests the system to replace the module, software is automatically down-loaded and the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating. All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure, satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the requirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
24
312401/B
System description
2.3.3 Centralized operation The K-Chief 500 system is operated through a number of Operator Stations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room. Additional stations may be located in the Wheelhouse, Cargo Control Room, Damage Control Room, Ship’s Office or other parts of the vessel. The Operator Stations are normally connected to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant Control Area Network. The Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic displays and are operated through a purpose built Operator Panel. The Operator Stations provides the operator with a number of standard display pictures containing information about the engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of the Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are provided in both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room. Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery space, and the Watch Calling system allows automatic calling of duty engineers. This allows both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinery watch is carried out from the Bridge. All Operator Stations are Windows based personal computers, type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel; none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via the dual redundant local area network. Although every Operator Station is identical, access to vital functions may be configured differently. The control availability is defined by extensive use of software password access. Some Operator Stations, such as units located in the Ship’s Office, are normally used for monitoring only. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or execution of control commands. All general information such as monitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available for inspection. Changing a limit or parameter on one Operator Station will automatically update all other Operator Stations. All operator actions, such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an alarm limit, are logged and time tagged (optional). Whenever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed Processing Units update the database in each of the Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Operator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to request data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access. The Operator Station serves as the database host for process data, engineering data and software. Software for Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units are stored
312401/B
25
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
here. They include functions for automatic down-loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is replaced. Configuration control of the K-Chief 500 systems is taken care of by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering database or the application software. The system logs all changes made. Version numbers and additional information can at any time be individually inspected for each K-Chief 500, as required by the major classification societies. Our commissioning editor (SeaMate) is used to configure or modify the functionality of the K-Chief 500 and is used to generate “as-built documentation”. The local area network included as part of K-Chief 500 system can interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even with other external computer systems.
26
312401/B
System description
2.4 Alarm system 2.4.1 Alarms Alarm groups
All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups. Each alarm group is displayed on the left side of the Operator Station screen when the Navigator image is displayed. The Navigator is an image which is shown when the HOME button on the Control Room Panel is pushed. The Navigator image makes it easy to navigate to the wanted information in the K-Chief 500 system. For more information on the Navigator please see Navigator on page 86 . Alarm types Alarm detection for analogue signals
The following functions are included: • Instrument failure alarms • Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Low process alarms • High process alarms • High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm fluctuations • Adjustable filters to remove fluctuations in the incoming signals • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals
The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check
The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Line broken alarm • Line short alarm • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages
312401/B
27
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Inhibit alarm
Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is present. This function is accomplished by defining a signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the inhibit situation for each signal. Alarm state indication
The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag, description and state will be displayed. The following states are used by the system: • On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN • On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED • On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN • On/off signal short alarm: SHORT • Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside low range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low) • Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High) • Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH • Analogue signal low alarm: LOW • Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI • Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO • On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: INHIBIT Alarm text colour
Different colours have been used to visually distinguish between the alarm states. The meaning of the different colours is listed below: • Normal state: GREEN • Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*) • State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED • Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW • Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE • Not updated or invalid values: ORANGE • Can be customised for extra critical alarms: MAGENTA
28
312401/B
System description
Alarm and monitoring displays
There are several display pages for presenting alarms and monitored values. The alarm pages comprise: • Alarm group display page • Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms • Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list of time-stamped alarms The monitoring pages include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Selected points display (and logging facility) • Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system 2.4.1.1 Alarm acknowledge
It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarm group or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgement for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done through a single push. It removes the alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display), and changes the colour on the alarm text in the list views. 2.4.1.2 Sound off
It is possible to make the alarm sound silent after it has notified an alarm. This is done by a single push on the sound off button. The alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display) is not changed by pushing the button.
312401/B
29
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.5 System functions, Alarm and Monitoring System 2.5.1 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring The K-Chief 500 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value of all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the acceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based on the engine load. The dead-band is set narrower as the engine load increases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account. Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are made when relevant. The maximum number of cylinders for each engine or cylinder bank is 16. As the average temperature is used as reference for the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load. When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked.
2.5.2 Trend monitoring The K-Chief 500 automatically records selected measurements, and stores them for use in the trend monitoring system. This system can display recorded and present data for all variables as curves. The trend monitoring system is a part of the Operator Station and consists of two trend displays: Short trend and Long trend. Please see How to make your own short trend display on page 162 and How to make your own long trend display on page 176 for more details.
2.5.3 Fuel performance system (optional) The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To study performance parameters momentary values are available. Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting. Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making continuous measurements. The following sensor data are required: • Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine • Both input and output flow must be measured • Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows
30
312401/B
System description
• Running signal for each propulsion engine • Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft • Ship speed Based on these measurements the following performance parameters are calculated: • Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs • Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs • Hull efficiency in kg/nm • Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh • Shaft power for each shaft in MW • Total shaft power in MW Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage period. Accumulated data includes: • Duration of voyage in hours • Distance travelled in nautical miles • Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons • Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons • Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh • Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so, the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel economising measurements and calculations are available as a display window on any of the Operator Stations.
2.5.4 Running hours and counters To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components need overhauling, it is important to know the running hours for each component. The K-Chief 500 running hours function keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans, compressors, purifiers, generators etc., and present the result to the operator on demand. Any status signal interfaced to the K-Chief 500 can be used to count running hours. Two separate counter functions are available: • Counter for total active running hour • Lap counter A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can be printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when units have been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be made to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit. Underneath is a K-Chief 500 display showing a counter image.
312401/B
31
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 3
Counter display
2.5.5 Tank display The K-Chief 500 system has an optional tank level monitoring system. It has different types of standard tank displays: • Cargo tank density display • General tank display • Level/ullage correction display • Ship display Cargo tank density display
It displays density calculations and different parameters. The following information is provided for each tank: • • • • •
Input number for the tank Name of the actual tank Type of tank content American Petroleum Institute (API) density Density in vacuum at 15ºC
• • • •
Density in air at 15ºC Density in air at specified temperature T [ºC] Temperature T [ºC] at which the density above is given Change in density (air) for a change in temperature of 1ºC
• Positive value if density is increasing by drop in temperature • Density at actual temperature
32
312401/B
System description
General tank display
The purpose of this display is to show the result of tank calculation for ballast-, fuel oil and miscellaneous tanks. The following information is provided for each tank: • Input number for the tank • Name of the tank • Type of tank content • Actual level corrected for specific gravity, sensor offset, trim and list • Actual volume in percent of full tank • Actual volume in cubic meter • Specific gravity at actual temperature • Weight in metric tonnes Level correction display
This display shows the parameters used for ullage and level correction calculations for each tank. The purpose of this display is to give the user a possibility to see the parameters used for the correction. Information provided in the display: • Input number for the tank • Name of the actual tank • Type of tank content • Measured ullage or level before corrections (this value will be displayed at the corresponding DPU if connected) • Specific gravity at actual temperature (left blank if ullage measuring) • Sensor height above lowest point of tank (left blank if ullage measuring) • Longitudinal correction for level sensor location (left blank if trim tables) • Transverse correction for level sensor location • Actual ullage or level corrected for specific gravity, sensor offset, trim and list Ship display
It displays the following: • Display of own ship’s main data • Total tank content display • Draught and trim display • Enter/change sea specific gravity • Trim/list type selection
312401/B
33
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.5.6 Engine monitoring Kongsberg Engine Monitoring Systems consist of bearing monitoring components covering Bearing Wear, Water in Oil, Temperature of all bearings and additional measuring points like: Cylinder liner, exhaust gas temperature ,Torque measurement Software and system components are common with K-Chief 500 and AutoChief C20, allowing integration and joined support. Data transfer via CAN bus is the base for easy communication with other Kongsberg systems.
Bearing Monitoring
The Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Systems consist of the PS-10 Bearing Wear Monitoring, Sentry Wireless Temperature Monitoring and PT100 Main Bearing Temperature
34
312401/B
System description
Sensors. In combination these solutions will give the most optimal monitoring of crosshead, crank and main bearing wear/temperature on 2-stroke engines. In a modern large bore two-stroke diesel engine, the reliability, particularly for critical components are vital. All major engine manufacturers continually work to maintain and improve reliability of existing and future machines in spite of i.e. higher output demands. In this picture bearing monitoring is important. The reason for this is firstly that constant monitoring of operating conditions and performance increases the chance of detecting a developing problem at an early stage. Secondly, experience has showed that some components fail most frequently shortly after an inspection, due to incorrect reassembly, foreign particles being introduced etc. Finally, servicing a part only when necessary reduces the owner’s maintenance costs. Both the Kongsberg Bearing Wear Monitoring and the Kongsberg Bearing Temperature Solutions have the function of predicting a bearing damage before it becomes critical. The systems will provide the crew with an early warning if any of the crank train bearings (crosshead-, crank- and main bearings) has an unexpected bearing problem during service. By providing advanced warning of impending problems, the consequential damage to crankshafts and connecting rods may be avoided. In addition the following advantages might be obtained by installing Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Solutions; • Extended time between “open up” intervals of bearings • Reduction of insurance costs The above benefits will call for individual discussions with the relevant Classification Society / Insurance Company. Bearing Wear Monitoring
The Bearing Wear Monitoring system predicts bearing wear in large two-stroke diesel engines, before it becomes critical. The system will provide an early warning if any of the three crank-train bearings (crosshead-, crank- and mean bearing) experience unexpected problems during ship operation. The Bearing Wear sensor is based on a high quality magnetic sensing element. The measurements take place every time the crosshead passes Bottom Dead Centre (BDC). Engine speed is measured continuously to compensate for engine loads and rpm. The Kongsberg BWM system complies with MAN specifications on all points. This includes Alarm log, short –and long term trend and data storage over more than 5 years. These functions are also available for other Kongsberg systems that easily can be connected to the BWM computer.
312401/B
35
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Sentry; Wireless temperature monitoring
Sentry is designed to monitor the temperature of crank pinand crosshead bearings in diesel engines. These bearings can experience rapid temperature changes during damage development. The sensors are designed to give immediate response to the monitoring system. The measurement system is based on radar technology with passive sensors without need of an external power source. A low energy and high frequency radar pulse is transmitted to the Sentry Wireless Sensor via the Sentry Stationary Antenna. When the sensor passes the antenna, the radar pulse is picked up and reflected back to the Sentry Signal Processing Unit. The shape and characteristics of the reflected pulse determine the temperature of the sensor, i.e. the bearing temperature. The processing unit software calculates the temperature and transmits this to the engine control and monitoring system. The installation of the stationary antenna related to the sensor is flexible and non-critical.
36
312401/B
System description
Main Bearing temperature
Custom designed main bearing temperature sensors can be fitted into any type of 2-stroke diesel engines. The sensors are mounted on the main bearing girder with the tip of the sensor in direct contact with the bearing shell. The sensor measures the combined temperatures of the bearing shell and of the lubrication oil that flows from the bearing. Cylinder Liner Temperature
The Cylinder Liner Monitoring system measures temperatures in the upper part of the cylinder liner 5-6 mm from the inner surface, thus monitoring the piston running performance in operation. Increased friction between the piston rings and the cylinder liner creates an elevated temperature level, leading to abnormal wear and eventually to piston breakage.
312401/B
37
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Scuffing monitoring and alarm
The added Kongsberg software and system components provide detection of cylinder liner scuffing. Scuffing occurs at sub-alarm level temperatures and is recognized by fluctuation temperature readings. When scuffing is detected, an alarm is given for the related cylinder. Scuffing control
When scuffing is detected an alarm is given for the related cylinder. An output is then given to the cylinder lubrication system that will increase the amount of cylinder lubrication oil to normalize the condition of the given liner. This function is only available in combination with the MAN Diesel Alpha lubricator. Water in oil detection
The quality of the lubrication oil is critical. Only a small content of water reduces the oils ability to lubricate the bearings. When the water content is high enough for the water to segregate from
38
312401/B
System description
the oil a rapid corrosive process of the bearings will occur. The life time of a Tin/Aluminium bearing may be reduced to only a few hours. This measuring point has become standard on all new MAN Diesel engines. MetaPower torque monitoring
The intention of MetaPower system is to enable the ship owner to optimize the operation parameters of the ship, i.e. to maintain or increase the speed with less consumption of fuel. This is carried out by measuring exact power transferred to the propeller(s) during the trimming procedure. MetaPower is based on a patented LASER technology. The principle is as follows:
An IR beam is transmitted from the processing unit (8) through optical fibre (3). In the optical forks (6) and (7) placed in a distance of around 1 m from each other, the light will be pulse modulated by the coding wheels (1) and (2). The modulation will depend on the shaft speed and torque. The signal is received in the processing unit, processed and displayed as rpm, torque and power on system level. The processing unit may via serial communication, analogue or digital outputs be connected to the automation system.
312401/B
39
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.6 System functions, Bridge Watch Monitoring System 2.6.1 About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System The Bridge Watch Monitoring System serves the following purposes: • Central bridge alarm panel provides visual and audible alarms and warnings. These are initiated by systems and individual navigation equipment serving primary bridge functions. • Bridge watch monitoring feature for detection of unattended bridge or operator disability based on interval checking. • Alarm transfer to specific locations outside the bridge to alert and call the master and back-up navigator(s), automatically initiated in case the bridge alarms are not attended to or an operator disability is detected. • Call back-up navigator for purpose of manual and instant initiation of alarm transfer from bridge for alert and call of master and back-up navigator(s).
2.6.2 About bridge watch alarms The Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems generates a prewarning and an alarm when the interval timers have expired. • Prewarning: Prewarnings are only given on the bridge. – 30 seconds before the alarm timer expires, a prewarning lamp starts flashing. – 15 seconds before the alarm timer expires, a prewarning buzzer starts sounding. • Alarm: The alarm is configurable to sound between 3 and 12 minutes after the last alarm-timer reset. To reset the alarm timer, push: – Any external sound off button – Any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring panel The alarm is given as follows: • When the alarm timer has expired in the captains and back-up officers quarters. • After an additional delay called “Last stage delay”. The alarm is given in the captain’s and all navigating officer’s quarters and in public areas. The “Last stage delay” is configurable between 0 and 3 minutes.
40
312401/B
System description
2.7 System functions, Process Control System All data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling and process control is performed by each individual Distributed Processing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation is available even if the Operator Stations are not functioning.
2.7.1 Stand-by pumps General
Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available from the Operator Stations in two ways: • Through the stand by pump display (mimic diagrams). • Through a (mimic) diagram included in the monitoring and control system. Stand by start at low pressure
When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump automatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analogue sensor is used. Inhibit stand by start
Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a group start, until the pressure has been built up. The stand by logic can also be inhibited by an external condition, such as “main engine stopped”, “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition. Restart after blackout
Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout. These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time defined in the Distributed Processing Unit’s pump logic determines the start sequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing. Group start of pumps
Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence. Alarms from the stand by pump logic
• Stand by start alarm • Auto start fail or trip • Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer in stand by mode). Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for the control functions.
312401/B
41
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Limits: All limits are downloaded from the Operator Station as part of its database. The limits may be adjusted at the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump system, the signals from the motor starters and the process are normally routed to different Distributed Processing Units. This configuration allows the system to work even if one of the Distributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is also active when the Operator Station is down.
2.7.2 Valve control General
Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available through the displays on the Operator Stations. Valve Types
Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital output signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the signals by one or two limit switches. Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital output and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed by pulsing a relay. Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is controlled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analogue input signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead band by pulsing a relay. Additional functions
In addition, the following functions are available as part of the valve control system: • Pulsed output. • Automatic closing of a set of valves. • Automatic opening or closing of valves. • Close on an analogue setpoint, using deadband. • Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a “low level” switch opens. • Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a “low level” switch opens. • Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.
42
312401/B
System description
2.7.3 PID controllers The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. All combinations of PID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished by connecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can be configured from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. The following parameters are available: • Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time) • Controller setpoint • Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve position control mode, SEMIAUTO) • Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID) • Selection of input and output signal type • Input and output channel number • Sampling time
2.7.4 Compressor control The compressor control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The main purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value. This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop of compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control. The compressor control system communicates with the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from here.
2.7.5 Purifier control The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The purifier control program is specially written to operate Alfa Laval’s self cleaning oil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment: • Crude oil booster pump (optional) • Crude oil temperature controller • Purifiers • Sealing valves • Discharge valves The equipment may be controlled from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually by operating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier control program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel. Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic
312401/B
43
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
display by showing the oil path as green lines. Purifier no. 1 will always run as purifier, whereas purifier no. 2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
2.7.6 Boiler control The boiler control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The program consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different types of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checking extensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, and provides visible alarms. Boiler system parameters are available on the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. All parameters are found in the steam system display. System information such as alarms and analogue values are part of the normal K-Chief 500 alarm and monitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of the following equipment: • Fuel oil stand-by pumps • Burner motor • Fuel pre-heater • Nozzles • Ignition unit • Air damper • Steam release valve These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit.
44
312401/B
System description
2.8 System functions, Power Management System 2.8.1 Introduction The Power Management System controls the power generation and distribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power plant. The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per connected generator unit. Each performs the power management functions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitable for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to the Operator Station, which allows the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. For complex Power Management Systems an additional Distributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode control etc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and communication, and allows separation of local PMS CAN process bus data traffic from other parts of the global CAN-network of the K-Chief 500 system. The Power Management System will be adapted to the specific configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. In order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for alarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed to separate Distributed Processing Units like this: • Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when needed). • PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each generator. • Diesel generator safety system: A separate Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1). • Bus-tie control: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each bus-tie. • Alarms: Two Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units. Note
These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.
312401/B
45
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2.8.2 Generator control functions Synchronizing
The Power Management System automatically selects and synchronizes generators to the net as required. A Distributed Processing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequency and breaker. Frequency control and loadsharing
When automatic mode is selected, one of the Distributed Processing Units must be defined as Master. The Distributed Processing Unit designated as “ No.1 Stand-By” will automatically be master if no other master selection is made. The bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard are available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency and voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency by controlling its engine’s speed. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing. Asymmetric loadsharing
The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost maximum load for a pre-defined period, while the second generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At the expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads. Symmetric loadsharing
If two or more generators are running and asymmetric load-sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equally between the generators. Load-dependent start/stop of the Stand-by Generators
Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically start, synchronise and connect its generator according to its assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the following requests: • Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators in operation cannot provide enough power. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents it from maintaining its share of the load. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator is approaching the point of overload.
46
312401/B
System description
It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature. Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running, independent of the load parameters. This feature is especially useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship’s bow thruster) is required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals. Automatic start-and-connect after a power blackout
The power blackout logic is triggered when the Power Management System detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage is low. (less than 10 % of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of the generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will start and connect to the bus. Supervision of Heavy Consumer switch-on
Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of the operating generators, the Power Management System will start up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.
2.8.3 Power management functions with shaft generator Main functions
One Distributed Processing Unit controls the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed Processing Units control the bus-tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable to various switchboard configurations. The following functions are available: • Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus-tie breaker with automatic synchronisation • Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stern thrusters • Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control the auxiliary generator sets Operational modes and mode control
The Power Management System allows many different modes of operation. Four standard modes are provided. Underneath are examples with 1 Shaft Generator (SG), 2 Diesel Generators (DG), 2 bus-ties and 1 bow thruster.
312401/B
47
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Harbour: Both DGs are running. Both bus-ties are closed. This mode allows the bow thruster to be started. If the load is low, and the bow thruster is not running, the stand-by DG will automatically be disconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster is running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator Distributed Processing Unit is activated. • At sea: The SG is running. Both bus-ties are closed. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. Both DGs are stopped and stand-by ready for start. • Cargo handling: Bus-tie 2 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port bus bar. The SG is powering heavy consumers on the stand-by bus bar. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. • Manoeuvre: Bus-tie 1 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bow thruster only. Transition between these modes is possible in two ways: • Mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes, leading to a set of actions which the operator has to perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that mode. • One-touch mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes, leading to a sequence of automatic events to put the Power Generating system into that mode. This one-touch control is to be made from the Operator Station. Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the net, to auxiliary generators powering the net, or to split net operation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary generators. Upon reception of this command, the Power Management System will only start one diesel at a time. Shaft Generator overload
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for overload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than a pre-defined period of time, a request for split net is generated. Shaft- and Auxiliary Generators in parallel
There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between shaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically be disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit. Shaft Generator control functions
The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing
48
312401/B
System description
Unit has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with diesel generators. When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the following functions are available: • Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft generator itself • Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is running (additional function to controller, with its own safety functions for the shaft generator) When the shaft generator is connected, the master Distributed Processing Unit will do load sharing on the diesel generator in parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the bus bar is a result of the ME (Main Engine) speed. Parallel load sharing between shaft generator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled from the Power Management System. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power Management System completely independent of the Alarm and Monitoring System.
312401/B
49
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3 UNIT DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 Overview This chapter gives a brief description of the main units of the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. Note
The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Topics
Operator Station (OS) on page 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) on page 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 53 Input Panel (INP) on page 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 56 on page Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) on page 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) on page 60 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) on page 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) on page 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a) on page 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) on page 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) on page 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) on page 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) on page 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) on page 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) on page 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) on page 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) on page 73 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) on page 75
50
312401/B
Unit descriptions
3.2 Operator Stations and Operator Panels 3.2.1 Operator Station (OS) The Operator Station is a type approved personal computer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer. Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer keyboard or through specially designed Operator Panels, providing easy access to the different operator functions. Figure 4
Operator Station (OS)
The Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for on-demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hard copy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm condition, several things happens. In the Alarm Navigator the alarm group which contains the alarm will start to flicker. The alarm is also displayed in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer automatically prints the alarm. By clicking on the flickering alarmgroup, more detailed alarm information is displayed on the colour graphics display. Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, such as alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colour graphics display, or printed on demand. Sensor data can be presented as a bar graph (analogue sensors) or a trend curve (analogue and digital sensors). Selected
312401/B
51
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
sensor data may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system can display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms. The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the system returns to normal. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable by using the Operator Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines, pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow. Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may be printed. The Operator Station is used when transferring machinery watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room, and selecting the engineer for watch-call duty. All available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called to the engine control room in case of an emergency.
3.2.2 Midi Operator Station (MOS) The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. It allows alarm indication, process control and power management. Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high resolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. The Midi Operator Station contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and uses these to display mimic diagrams. Figure 5
Alarm and Monitoring System (cJoy)
The Midi Operator Station gives the operator the possibility to: • Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to a controllable object
52
312401/B
Unit descriptions
• Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual and audible signals • Interface to a printer for alarm logging purposes • Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical feedback • Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed Processing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.
3.2.3 Control Room Panel (CRP) The Control Room Panel (CRP) contains the following: • A 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation, entering numbers and text into the system • A trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover • An alarm area containing three alarm buttons and an alarm lamp (ACK, “Silence" and ALARM VIEW). • A command area containing three command buttons (TAKE, GIVE and STATUS). They are related to access and control transfer, but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management. • A panel area containing three status lamps (POWER, FAULT and ALARM) The CRP do not have background light. It is meant to be placed in a room with light, like the control room. But the CRP have LED indicators, for instance in the alarm and panel area. The CRP is powered from 24 Vdc.
312401/B
53
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 6
Control Room Panel (CRP)
3.2.4 Input Panel (INP) The Input Panel contains a 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation, entering numbers and text into the system It has also a trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover. The background light can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of. A light sensor registers the light intensity above the panel and can be used for controlling background light and status lamps automatically. The Input Panel is powered from 24 Vdc.
54
312401/B
Unit descriptions
Figure 7
Input Panel (INP)
3.2.5 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) The ALC Panel is used for Command Control and Alarm Control by pushing dedicated buttons, and it displays and sounds system status by its status lamps and buzzers. The light intensity of the background light and the status lamps can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of. The ALC Panel is powered and communicates through a single USB cable. The ALC Panel contains the following controls and indicators: • Three status lamps (POWER, FAULT and ALARM) • Three command buttons (TAKE, GIVE and STATUS).They are related to access and control transfer, but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management. • Three alarm buttons (ACK, “Silence" and ALARM VIEW), and an alarm lamp.
312401/B
55
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 8
Alarm & Control Panel (ALC)
3.2.6 Touch Control Panel (TCP) The Touch Control Panel (TCP) is used to interact with the images on the colour monitor of the Operator Station of the K-Chief 500 system. The image on the TCP is called the Navigator and is divided in two parts; the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. The Navigator is constantly displayed to give easy access to all the information of the K-Chief 500 system. The TCP frame is made of aluminium and stainless steel. The rear has several apertures for sufficient ventilation. The TCP is easy to install into a console. It is mounted smoothly using four bolts, one in each corner. To reduce the reflective shine from the sun, the TCP is anti-glare. It is also dimmable, so it can be adjusted for use during day and night time.
56
312401/B
Unit descriptions
Figure 9
312401/B
Touch Control Panel (TCP)
57
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3.3 Watch Calling System 3.3.1 Purpose The watch calling system is designed to allow the engine room and the control room to be periodically unmanned. It consists of: • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) • Operator Stations The main purposes of Watch Bridge Units are: • To indicate the Watch Responsible area • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and someone is On Duty • To allow you to contact (call) duty personnel, and/or all personnel The main purposes of Watch Cabin Units are: • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To indicates when you are being called and who is calling • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs Figure 10
Basic Watch Calling System components
3.3.2 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is acknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go unacknowledged: First-time/original alarm
The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:
58
312401/B
Unit descriptions
• The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Second-time/1st repeat alarm
If the alarm remains unacknowledged after a set period of time, it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Third-time/2nd repeat alarm
If the alarm is still not acknowledged, after a set period of time, it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas
3.3.3 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and a LCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text. Figure 11
312401/B
Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type
59
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 12
Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type
When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will call them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. The alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is a buzzer sound and a single or group alarm lamp which is flashing. When an alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge Unit. The K-Chief 500 prevents the bridge from assuming watch responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. The bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters at any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such calls is provided. Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the machinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has been acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer will not sound.
3.3.4 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and a LCD type. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. They are placed in the engineer’s cabins and in public areas. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text.
60
312401/B
Unit descriptions
Figure 13
Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LCD type
Figure 14
Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type
To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm condition arises a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineer’s cabins and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps. When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the alarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control room to find the cause of the alarm.
312401/B
61
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
When the alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units. If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of time, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters, and on the bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be used to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without an alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty mode.
62
312401/B
Unit descriptions
3.4 Distributed Processing Units 3.4.1 Main characteristics A number of different Distributed Processing Units (DPU) are available for different tasks. The main functions of the Distributed Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. All units have the same mechanical construction and are built using the same electronic design principles. The main characteristics of the Distributed Processing Units are: • LED indicators on the housing for Watch-Dog, Run, General information, unit initialised and power polarity • Three-way isolation between I/O and power, I/O and process-bus, power and process-bus • Single printed circuit board design • Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dip switches, jumpers or sockets • No additional EMC protection required (only IP) • Time synchronisation • Non-volatile memory • Remote alarms function • Dual CAN-bus interfaces • Software can be downloaded into the unit • Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power and sensor excitation overload • All parameters are stored in each unit • Each unit is remotely configurable • No serviceable parts inside • All connections are pluggable Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor. These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits. Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of the machinery. Status information is continuously monitored by the K-Chief 500 Operator Stations through the system network. When an unacceptable condition is detected, the Distributed Process Unit and K-Chief 500 generates an alarm signal, identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information about the condition.
312401/B
63
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3.4.2 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel is selectable as voltage, current and resistance input in different ranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a 5 to 500Hz counter channel. • 16 analogue or digital input channels • Scaled in technical units • 1 counter 5 to 500 Hz • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds) • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 15
Remote Analogue input (RAi-16)
3.4.3 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperature measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different types. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust temperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can be connected, with ranges ± 50, ± 200, 0 to + 600 °C. A Cold Junction Compensation function is included. If external compensation is needed, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16 is recommended. • 10 thermo-coupler input channels • Scaled in technical units • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events
64
312401/B
Unit descriptions
• Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 16
Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc)
3.4.4 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a) These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and include LED status indicators. • 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators • Input dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 17
312401/B
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32)
65
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 18
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32a)
3.4.5 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel is selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and almost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to drive analogue indicators. By placing the module close to instruments, long cables can be avoided. • 8 analogue output channels • ± 10 VDC / ±20 mA • CAN net status, error handling Figure 19
Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)
3.4.6 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) The RDo-16 module has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3 Amperes (resistive load). The maximum voltage is 230 VAC. • Change over, brake before make relay-contacts • Pulse on output • Pulse off output
66
312401/B
Unit descriptions
• CAN net status, error handling Figure 20
Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)
3.4.7 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed Processing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generator control, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems. The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can be individually configured to handle both analogue and digital signals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current signal. Based on these signals the following values can be measured and calculated: • AC voltage available from generator and busbar • AC current supplied from the generator • AC frequency of generator and busbar • Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuit breakers • Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculating reactive load, kVAr • Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phase angle The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotating speed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. The two analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage or current. The unit can further control six digital output channels; 2-pole relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with built-in loop fail detection facilities.
312401/B
67
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Table 1
RIO-C1 Process Connections
Number of channels
Function
Level
6
Digital output
Solenoid valve driver or relay, max 3 A resistive load
2
Analogue output
mA
2
Analogue input, AC voltage (1-phase)
Max. 30 Vrms, 50/60 Hz
1
Analogue input, AC current
Max. 1 A, 50/60 Hz
4
Analogue/digital input, flexible
As RAi-16
2
Input from pickup
24 VDC (counter input)
4
Digital input
As RDI-32
• 21 analogue or digital, input and output channels with LED status indicator • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 21
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)
3.4.8 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and outputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. The digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch) or an external 24 VDC or 24 VAC signal. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When the faulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic
68
312401/B
Unit descriptions
fuse is automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital output channels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It is particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. • 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator • 8 channels relays change over, brake before make • 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24 VDC live input or dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 22
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)
3.4.9 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) The RIO-C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The module has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independent of external indicators. The RIO-C3 module is available in two versions: • C3-GP for generator protection • C3-GDCP for generator and differential current protection The module has a dual 24 Vdc power connection to un-interruptible power supply and generator voltage. • Short circuit tripping of generator CB • Over current tripping of generator CB • Reverse power tripping of generator CB • Optional differential current protection • Local indication of reason for trip • Local reset of tripping
312401/B
69
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr) • Calculation of phase angle between voltage and current (cosine φ) Figure 23
Generator Protection (RIO-C3)
3.4.10 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and bus-tie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers, as well as switchboard equipment. • Synchronize and connect of generator CB • Synchronize and connect of bus-tie CB • Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine • RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine • Optional control of primer pump for AE • Optional control of fuel selection for AE • Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr) • Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr) • Load sharing between generators • AVR set point control (optional) Figure 24
70
Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4)
312401/B
Unit descriptions
3.4.11 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) The DGU module is designed to communicate with external equipment on serial line or CAN, and to communicate with ROS on global CAN. All communication ports on the module are isolated. Main features
• 2 CAN Communication channels • 2 CAN Communication channels, global • 2 serial lines, RS422/485. • Scaled in technical units. • Limit check. • Alarm and monitoring for all channels. • Trend. • Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds). • Self checking. • CAN net status, error handling. Figure 25
Digital Governor Unit (DGU)
3.4.12 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) The MSI 12 is a module for interfacing NMEA interfaces for recording and transmission of data. It is 4 NMEA ports for receiving, 4 NMEA ports for NMEA I/O communication, 4 Digital I/O and 10 digital output on the MSI 12. The modules connections are powered and communicates using USB interface to the computer. The digital signal inputs and outputs are powered from a separate 24 VDC input. The MSI 12 is designed to meet the requirements to signal interfaces as required to voyage data recorders as specified by IMO.
312401/B
71
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 26
Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12)
• Self check • Remote configurable • No trimmers or jumpers • No serviceable parts • All connections plugable • Type approved
3.4.13 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) The CAN line is vulnerable to both short-circuit and non-terminal line conditions. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN segment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections of a CAN segment from each other. Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the ISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process Segment Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that are not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunction on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals. The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125 kBaud is 530 m. A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to 515 m. This length is the maximum line length between any two nodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use the Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process segment, where the segment is running through rough environment or fire zones.
72
312401/B
Unit descriptions
Figure 27
Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS)
3.4.14 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards. The module secures the installation of the power management and generator protection system by transforming the higher voltages to low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The module handles three major tasks: • To supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage from the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2, L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC • To supply the C3 generator protection module with 24 VDC power (1 A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source • To supply the C4 power management module with a single phase AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the switchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformers for 690 VAC. Figure 28
312401/B
Voltage Converter Controller (VCC)
73
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3.5 Gateways 3.5.1 Gateway types Two types of gateways are available: • System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW is used as a redundant gateway between the CAN-bus and the Local Area Network. • Dual Processing System Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is used as a redundant gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the CAN-bus). The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus traffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between the network parts, while maintaining redundancy. Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed Processing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units and Operator Panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If the communication with one node fails, the gateway will generate a system failure message identifying the node and the failure. The Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.
3.5.2 The System Gateway (SGW) The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local Area Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages from the two CAN-buses and update the Operator Stations. Handling of operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from the Operator Stations to the nodes (Distributed Processing Units) are handled as well. The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages between the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messages needed in more than one bus segment, typically messages for inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down. The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter, sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area Network. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages and load them into a local database for distribution. The opposite way the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units or Local Operator panels). All necessary configuration and software installation is done through the Local Area Network. The Simple Network Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the
74
312401/B
Unit descriptions
Local Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases. Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24 Vdc power input and the System Gateway interfaces.
3.5.3 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN gateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CAN interfaces. The two processors have separate power connections, and they share information via dual port memory. In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for logic functions. The main function is to process messages from the local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus, where they are available for other dual Process Segment Controllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from any System Gateway or Operator Station to the Distributed Processing Units connected to the local CAN-bus. When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of Distributed Processing Units, both processors are working in parallel running the same process algorithm. In this way the dual Process Segment Controller operates as a running back-up. The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial interface (RS–422/RS–485), primarily designated to communicate with other vendor’s equipment. Galvanic isolation is provided between the power connections and the CAN-bus and between the two CAN-buses. Figure 29
Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)
The main features of the dPSC are: • Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic isolated processors • Possible to power the two processors from separate power supplies • High speed data-link between the two processors
312401/B
75
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN channels • Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN segments • Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS–422/RS–485, to communicate with other vendor’s equipment • Various redundant application process control logic When the two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling the same Distributed Processing Unit, they are working in parallel running the same process algorithm.
76
312401/B
User interface
4 USER INTERFACE 4.1 Overview The standard K-Chief 500 hardware user interface consists of a colour monitor screen, an Operator Panel and an alphanumeric keyboard. The monitor is used to display the operator images of the K-Chief 500 system. One or more Operator Panels are used to interact with these images. The alphanumeric keyboard is used for set-up and configuration purposes.
4.1.1 Operator functions The following main functions are accessible from the Operator Panels: • Alarm display selection and acknowledgement • Set-up and selection of information to be monitored • Set-up and activation of logging (printing) • Parameter adjustment • Extended alarm and watch-calling functions When only monitoring facilities are required, the panel’s control functions can be inhibited.
4.1.2 Alarm and monitoring display A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms and monitored values. Alarm windows include: • Alarm group display • Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages • Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stamped alarm messages Monitoring windows include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Information display for a selected point • Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system
4.1.3 Process mimics, bar graphs and status displays The system can, as an option, include a number of standard display pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding equipment. The standard mimic windows are: • Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph • Bar graphs
312401/B
77
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Trend curves In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each project according to the piping diagrams. These display windows show the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped, % filling etc.). They are interactive, thus allowing operation of the equipment.
4.1.4 Logging and hard copy All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selected points log can also be configured to be printed at specified intervals. All alarms are printed in red. As an option, a separate deskjet printer can be fitted to print mimic display windows.
4.1.5 Self-checking and diagnostics The on-line Built In Self-Test (BIST) system monitors the temperature, power and sensor excitation of each DPU. Testing of the Operator Stations and their ability to give alarms according to the requirements is initiated by clicking on the thumbnail called: ALARM TEST. This thumbnail can be found in the Navigator under the main group called: SERVICE. In addition, the electronics is automatically tested when power is turned on.
4.1.6 Access control In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Operator Station, an advanced password system is available. Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use of passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags (optional).
78
312401/B
User interface
4.2 System images 4.2.1 Display layout The Operator Station screen display is divided into different fixed areas. See Display layout on page 79 for an illustration. Each of these areas has a separate function and they are updated independently of each other. The information displayed varies according to the type of command or task being performed. Figure 30
Display layout
• Title window: Contains the title of the information currently shown in the main window • Status window: The status window is divided into two columns. These contains important status information for user settings. • Time window: Shows current date and time. • Main window: Contains the image which displays information such as alarmlists, trends, monitoring etc. • Function window: Displays information related to user input. • Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of the information displayed in the main window.
4.2.2 Image types in the main window The various system images displayed in the main window are for example:
312401/B
79
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Process image • List image • Trend image • Monitoring image • System configuration image • PDF viewer • Navigator image
4.2.3 Process image The Process image provides an enhanced graphical presentation of some parts of a process. Elements of the image can be linked to one or several function modules. An example of a Process image is shown below. Figure 31
Process image
4.2.4 List image The List image provides a sortable tabular view, containing selected information from the tags in the system. Two examples of List images are shown below.
80
312401/B
User interface
312401/B
Figure 32
Alarm history
Figure 33
Alarm summary
81
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4.2.5 Trend image A Trend image fills the main view area. The image may have different presentations, and each trend may in turn contain several trend curves. The K-Chief 500 has two types of trends; short trend and long trend. An example of a Trend image is shown below. Figure 34
82
Long trend image
312401/B
User interface
4.2.6 Monitoring image There are several monitoring images in the K-Chief 500 system. An example of a monitoring image is shown underneath. Figure 35
312401/B
Group list image
83
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4.2.7 System configuration image The System configuration images show the operational status information of all system components within the automation system. The lines between the equipment illustrate the communication network. An example of a System configuration image is shown below. Figure 36
84
System configuration image
312401/B
User interface
4.2.8 PDF viewer The PDF viewer is a tool in the Navigator used to open PDF documents. To add a PDF document, the document must be copied into this directory: c:\ros\config\doc
Remember to click Refresh List to be able to view the latest copied document. The document can now be opened from the document list, located in the upper left corner of the window. A page or a dialogue can be printed from the document by clicking on the Print Page button or Print Dialogue. The print function is located at the left side of the window. A search function is also available in the PDF viewer. The search function is located under the printing function, on the left side of the window. Type the word or the sentence you want to find and click on the All button. Select the wanted part of the document from the resulting list. An example of the PDF viewer is shown below. Figure 37
312401/B
PDF viewer image
85
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4.2.9 Navigator The Navigator is the image on the Touch Control Panel. The image appears also at the Operator Station when the Home button on the Control Room Panel(CRP)/Input Panel(INP) is pushed. The Navigator gives access to all system displays. The Navigator is divided in 2 function areas, the Graphic Display Navigator and the Alarm Navigator. The different alarmgroups can be selected in the Alarm Navigator. In the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator you have the main groups, such as List views, Misc, Favorites, etc. Clicking on one of the main groups will give access to the sub-groups. These sub-groups are called Graphic Display Thumbnails. If there are more than twelve main groups in the system, the Page Up and Page Down buttons can be used to toggle between the groups. For easy navigation, press one of the alphanumeric keys (1 to 9) to jump to the corresponding sub-group. Below is an example of how the Navigator may look like. Figure 38
86
Navigator image
312401/B
User interface
4.2.10 How processes are displayed and controlled The number of images in a system depends on the amount of equipment under K-Chief 500 control. The system is designed in a way which gives varying levels of detail about the process depending on which image is selected. When an image showing an overall process is selected, there may not be enough room to display all the details on a single screen. The K-Chief 500 system will then have a number of images linked to the main image in order to show these details. This is exemplified by the following two images. The first image is an example of a Thermal oil primary system. The second image displays details of one Cargo heating secondary system. The second image appears when the grey button down to the right on the first image is pushed. Figure 39
312401/B
Primary system image (Thermal oil)
87
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 40
Secondary system image (Cargo Heating)
Normally not more than two levels of images will be used, although this can be arranged if required.
88
312401/B
User interface
4.3 ShipViewer ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal computer connected to the K-Chief 500 local area network. The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similar viewing capabilities as those found in the Operator Station, but no control functions. The following systems can be monitored through the ShipViewer, dependent on the system configuration: • Engine monitoring and control system • Power management system • Fire system • Tank system The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data and allows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoid misunderstanding and lack of information. Main functions include: • Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams • Presentation of alarms • Presentation of alarm history • Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.
312401/B
89
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5 GETTING STARTED 5.1 Operator stations and panels This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and displays of the different K-Chief 500 Operator Stations and panels. It is intended for personnel just having started to use the system. The following subjects are covered: Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 91 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 95 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 97 Using the Input Panel (INP) on page 100 Using the Midi Operator Station on page 103 Using the Watch Bridge Unit on page 107 Using the Watch Cabin Unit on page 110
90
312401/B
Getting started
5.2 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 5.2.1 Understanding the CRP The CRP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. The following illustration shows the layout of the CRP. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into groups. The button groups are explained below. Figure 41
Control Room Panel (CRP) layout
5.2.2 ALARM group buttons and lamp The ALARM group comprises one lamp and three buttons.
312401/B
91
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
ALARM LAMP
The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. ACK
When the ACK button is pushed, the alarm will be acknowledge. Two things will happen simultaneously. The alarm buzzer will be silent, and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. SOUND OFF
When the sound of button is pushed, the alarm sound will be silent. ALARM VIEW
The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed.
5.2.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps. POWER
The lamp is lit green when the panel is on, and the power is OK. FAULT
The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer, or it is turned off.
5.2.4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. They are used to transfer access and control. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE
Push this button to request access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE
Push this button to give access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated. STATUS
When the status button is pushed, a window will be opened. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access.
92
312401/B
Getting started
5.2.5 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons. One of these has a lamp. This is the abc... (toggle) button. HOME
This button is used to return to the Navigator window. abc...
This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. Numeric mode is default. Press the button for one second to toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters), and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer. 2 / abc
The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in, numeric or alphanumeric mode. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def, 4/ghi, 5/jkl, 6/mno, 7/pqr, 8/tuv, 9/wxyz.) The number, 2, is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. When alphanumeric mode is selected, the letter, a, will be entered by pushing one time at the button. Pushing two times, the letter, b, is entered. Three pushes enters the letter, c. PAGE UP
This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). PAGE DOWN
This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). ESCAPE
The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop. For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list. BACKSPACE
This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character. (Same function as on a standard keyboard) ENTER
This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.
312401/B
93
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5.2.6 Trackball There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball . Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. The other four are located on each side of the trackball . Trackball
It is used for navigation on the screen. Mouse buttons
Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse. Arrow buttons
On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard.
5.2.7 Buzzer There are three buzzers. One is controlled directly by power, to alarm when power is lost (sounds for at least 60 sec.), and also by the local controller as the two others. The sound intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated, and the intensity setting can be configured. The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller.
5.2.8 Temperature sensor A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.
94
312401/B
Getting started
5.3 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) 5.3.1 Understanding the TCP The TCP is a specially designed panel which provides easy access to the operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. The following illustration shows the layout of the TCP. The different areas found on the panel can be divided into groups. These groups are explained and illustrated below. Figure 42
Touch Control Panel (TCP) layout
5.3.2 Alarm Navigator The Alarm Navigator gives easy access to the different alarm groups in the system. Beside each alarmgroup is the number of alarms which are not attended to displayed. When an alarm is not acknowledged, the number shown to the right of the corresponding alarm group will flicker. Some K-Chief 500 systems may have many alarm groups. In this case the softbuttons on the upper part of the Alarm Navigator can be used to toggle between the different alarm group lists. There is also a viewing of the number of alarms not acknowledged in each list on these softbuttons.
312401/B
95
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5.3.3 Graphic Display Navigator The upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator holds softbuttons for the main groups, for example Favourites, List Views etc. By touching one of these softbuttons, the corresponding Graphic Display Thumbnail will appear under the main group area. By touching a Graphic Display Thumbnail the wanted information for that view will be displayed on the monitor of the Operator Station (OS). In the main group area is also a softbutton called, History. When this softbutton is touched, the nine last thumbnails that the operator has opened are displayed. A K-Chief 500 system may have more than 12 main groups. The
page up and page down softbuttons are then used to get access
to all the main groups.
96
312401/B
Getting started
5.4 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) 5.4.1 Understanding the ALC The ALC is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. The following illustration shows the layout of the ALC. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. Figure 43
Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) layout
5.4.2 ALARM group buttons and lamps The ALARM group comprises one lamp, three buttons without lamp. ALARM LAMP
The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. ACK
When the ACK button is pushed, the alarm will be acknowledge. Two things will happen simultaneously. The alarm buzzer will be silent, and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more
312401/B
97
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. SOUND OFF
When the sound of button is pushed, the alarm sound will be silent. ALARM VIEW
The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed.
5.4.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps. POWER
The lamp is lit green when the panel is on, and the power is OK. FAULT
The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer, or it is turned off.
5.4.4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. They are used to transfer access and control. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE
Push this button to request access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE
Push this button to give access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated. STATUS
When the status button is pushed, a window will be opened. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access.
5.4.5 Background light The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB and is implemented locally using PWM.
5.4.6 Buzzer There are three buzzers. All are controlled by the local controller. One of them is, in addition, controlled directly by power. If power is lost, an alarm sounds for at least 60 seconds. The sound
98
312401/B
Getting started
intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated, and the intensity setting can be configured. The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller.
5.4.7 Temperature sensor A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.
312401/B
99
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5.5 Using the Input Panel (INP) 5.5.1 Understanding the INP The INP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. The following illustration shows the layout of the INP. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. Figure 44
Input Panel (INP) layout
5.5.2 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons. HOME
This button is used to return to the Navigator window. abc...
This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. Numeric mode is default. Press the button for one second to toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters), and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer.
100
312401/B
Getting started
2 / abc
The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in, numeric or alphanumeric mode. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def, 4/ghi, 5/jkl, 6/mno, 7/pqr, 8/tuv, 9/wxyz.) The number, 2, is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. When alphanumeric mode is selected, the letter, a, will be entered by pushing one time at the button. Pushing two times, the letter, b, is entered. Three pushes enters the letter, c. PAGE UP
This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). PAGE DOWN
This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). ESCAPE
The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop. For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list. BACKSPACE
This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character. (Same function as on a standard keyboard) ENTER
This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.
5.5.3 Trackball There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball . Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. The other four are located on each side of the trackball . Trackball
This is used for navigation on the screen. Mouse buttons
Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse. Arrow buttons
On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard.
312401/B
101
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5.5.4 Background light The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB, and the function is implemented in the module using PWM.
5.5.5 Temperature sensor A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.
102
312401/B
Getting started
5.6 Using the Midi Operator Station 5.6.1 Range of use The Midi Operator Station (MOS) is a specially designed Operator Station that provides easy access to operator functions. It is used as a local or main Operator Station in K-Chief 500 systems and as the bridge display for Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems. Note
The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.
5.6.2 Understanding the keyboard Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any time. Other key functions are related to certain menus and can only be applied when the appropriate menu is open. Figure 45
312401/B
MOS keyboard layout
103
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Escape
Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up to five steps by pushing repeatedly. Menu
Turns menus on. The menu displayed will vary with the operational context. Enter
Go to sub-menu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data. Gives access to set-up displays. Page up
Moves the displayed information up a page in the selected group. Used to increase in some displays. Page down
Moves the displayed information down a page in the selected group. Used to decrease in some displays. Sound off
Push to turn audible alarms off. Alarm acknowledge
Push to acknowledge the displayed alarm. Four-way navigator key
Moves a square cursor up/down to select text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and to select objects in mimic pictures. Alphanumeric keys (0–9)
Used for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed. Special characters key
Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed. Function keys (F1–F4)
The function is specified by the text next to the key (left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the functions keys again. Figure 46
104
Function keys (right) and function (left)
312401/B
Getting started
5.6.3 Understanding the display The Midi Operator Station includes a bright colour flat panel display. The operator interacts with the display through the keyboard. • Window title – Contains the title of the information currently displayed in the main window. • Menu window – Displays the various menus available. • Scroll bar – Indicates how much of the total information in this window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard Windows applications). Use page up and page down or the top and bottom of the navigator key. • Alarm window – Displays the last alarm independent of the information displayed in the main window. Figure 47
312401/B
Display layout example
105
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 48
Display layout example including graphics
5.6.4 Menus The following menus are available: Main Menu 1 Alarm Menu 2 Tag Selection Menu 3 User Access 4 Configuration Menu 5 Keyboard/Screen The amount of options in the Main Menu vary according to how the User Access settings are sat. Alarm Menu 1 Alarm History 2 Alarm Summary 3 Alarm Group Display 4 Offscan Display Tag Selection Menu 1 Control Menu 2 PMS Menu 3 All tags
106
312401/B
Getting started
User Access Level Active level Commissioning SuperUser User Monitoring
OFF OFF ON OFF
Change Password Configuration Menu 1 Self check 2 Palette Display 3 Clock 4 Favourite Mimics Keyboard and Screen Colour Palette Keyboard Click Key Timeout Keyboard Light Screen Brightness
Day ON Disabled
5.7 Using the Watch Bridge Unit 5.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type, which has a 4 row by 40 characters display, and seven alarm groups. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type, which has nineteen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.
312401/B
107
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 49
108
Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type
312401/B
Getting started
Figure 50
Watch Bridge Unit, LED type
The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. • The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.
5.7.2 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels
312401/B
1
Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST , then SELECT
2
Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
and use the arrow buttons.
109
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 51
Illumination adjustment
5.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1
Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2
Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
5.7.4 How to test the panel 1
Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.
5.8 Using the Watch Cabin Unit 5.8.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type, which has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six alarm groups. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type, which has seventeen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.
110
312401/B
Getting started
Figure 52
312401/B
Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type
111
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 53
Watch Cabin Unit, LED type
The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. • The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.
5.8.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:
112
1
Push SOUND OFF .
2
Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator.
3
Take appropriate action.
4
Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm situation no longer exist.
312401/B
Getting started
5.8.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 1
Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST , then SELECT
2
Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
and use the arrow buttons.
Figure 54
Illumination adjustment
5.8.4 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1
Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2
Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
5.8.5 How to test the panel 1
Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.
312401/B
113
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM 6.1 Overview This chapter contains detailed descriptions of how to operate the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System using the different Operator Stations and panels. It is intended for users already familiar with the “Getting Started” section of this manual. The following subjects are covered: OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 115 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 180 MOS operational procedures on page 242 Watch Calling system operational procedures on page 252 ShipViewer operational procedures on page 255 ME monitoring operational procedures on page 263
114
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 6.2.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: • The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed. • The alarm indicator on the Control Room Panel starts flashing. • The buzzer in the Control Room Panel is activated. • The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. • External alarm devices, such as engine room horn and rotating light, are activated. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to handle an alarm: 1
Push the SOUND OFF button on the Control Room Panel (CRP). • This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.
2
Push the ALARM VIEW button. • The alarm is displayed in red on the screen.
3
Push the ACK button. • This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.
4
Attend to the alarm situation.
Note
The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the lower right side of the colour graphics display, called the Alarm window.
6.2.2 Navigator name definitions The Navigator is the image which is shown on the Operator Station when the home-button on the Control Room Panel is pushed. It is similar to the image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP). The Navigator image is divided in 2 parts, the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. This is illustrated
312401/B
115
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
in figure, Navigator name definitions on page 116. For more information on the Navigator, see Navigator on page 86 and Understanding the TCP on page 95. Figure 55
Navigator name definitions
6.2.3 How alarms are printed after a black-out Loss of ships power
The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Operator Stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate uninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain power for 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unit timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. This time stamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected. Loss of power to Operator Stations
The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information. If the Operator Stations loose power, the system will continue to operate When power is restored to the Operator Stations, all alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected.
6.2.4 How to acknowledge alarms Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-, an alarm group- or an alarm summary/alarm history display is active. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states.
116
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
It is one way to acknowledge alarms, but the result on the screen of the Operator Station will be different depending on which image is displayed at the time the ACK button is pushed. Push the ACK button.
Result of pushing the ACK button when the alarm history image or the alarm summary image is open:
Two things happens simultaneously: • A maximum of three alarms, on the colour graphics display, are acknowledged at the same time. The alarm text turns yellow. And when the alarm condition returns to normal, the text becomes green. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the Alarm window, the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. Result of pushing the ACK button when an alarmgroup image is open:
Two things happens simultaneously: • All active alarms shown on the colour graphics display are acknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarms in the group push the PAGE DOWN button, or use the scrolling function on the right side of the screen. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the additional alarms. The red alarm text disappear. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the , the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. Result of pushing the ACK button when another image which is not mentioned above is open:
• There are no changes on the main colour graphics display image. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the , the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed.
6.2.5 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image shows all active and acknowledged alarms. Alarm Summary on page 118 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image.
312401/B
117
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 56
Alarm Summary
Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. It is possible to open the alarm summary in two ways: Method 1:
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY. • A summary of all active and acknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display.
4
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
118
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Method 2:
1
Push the Alarm view button.
2
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
6.2.6 How to display alarm history The alarm history image shows all alarm events chronological. The newest alarms are displayed on top. Alarm History on page 119 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. Figure 57
Alarm History
Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm history:
312401/B
119
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY. • A complete chronological list of all alarm events are displayed on the colour graphics display.
4
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
6.2.7 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. Use the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup.
3
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
4
120
For more details on one tag, double click on the line with the wanted tag.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2.8 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY. • The system counters are now displayed. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys.
4
Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change. Click on the digit. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed.
5
Type in the wanted value, and click Yes to confirm.
6.2.9 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
312401/B
Use the trackball , point and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
121
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS
• Offscan tags are displayed. 4
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used.
6.2.10 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. Use the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup.
3
Right click anywhere on the screen. • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.
4
Right click on the grey box, and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display.
6.2.11 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place, it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk or night viewing.
122
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
Monitor Dimmer Functions
The monitor can be adjusted to day palette, dawn palette and night palette. 1
Click on the option button beside the wanted palette. The change is visible at once.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP, INP, ALC and TCP, without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. Just set the wanted monitor palette, and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. Lamp intensity Function
This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP).
312401/B
123
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 7 will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
Touch Display intensity
This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP. 1
Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 100 % will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
Backlight intensity
This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). 1
Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 100 % will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
6.2.12 Screen Saver On the Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off, and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
124
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function.
5
Type in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on.
6
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
6.2.13 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. 1
At the lower, left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on this icon. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
312401/B
125
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2
Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. If not, use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. • The screen dump is now saved.
6.2.14 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the sofftbutton: MENY. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
3
126
Click on the text : Clear HISTORY..
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Choose your favourite thumbnails just by clicking once on them. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails.) The first you click on will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group, Favorites, are displayed.
5
Click once more on the MENY softbutton. • The same window, like the one in item 2, will appear.
6
This time, click on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group, Favorites.
6.2.15 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. This printer will have a defined function, either as an alarm printer or a log printer. If it is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both functions. Note
A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. See the list of logs underneath. List of the Miscellaneous Logs
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
312401/B
Alarm Summary Log (standard) Alarm History Log (standard) Offscan tags Log (standard) Inhibited tags Log (standard) Alarm Log (standard) Group Log (standard) Selected points Log (standard) Autolog (standard) Noonlog (standard) Complete Log (standard) Event Log (standard) Counters Log (option) Tank Log (option) Level & Draft Correction Log (option) API Log (option)
127
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. Except from the Selected Points log, Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. The printing procedure for the Event Log, Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Note
The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. See How to configure the Autolog on page 135, and How to configure the Noonlog on page 136. Note
Before printing a Selected Points Log, the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133. Note
To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 132. How to print: Alarm Summary Log , Inhibited tags log, Alarm log, Complete log, Counters log, Tank Log, Level & Draft Correction Log, API Log, Ullage Log and Custom Log
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS
• A window similar to the one underneath appears.
128
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm Summary Log)
5
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. • The printing of the chosen log will start. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.
How to print: Alarm History Log, Event Log and Group Log
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS
• A window similar to the one underneath appears.
312401/B
129
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm History Log)
See Alarm History Log on page 130, Event Log on page 131 and Group Log on page 131 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs. Figure 58
130
Alarm History Log
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
312401/B
Figure 59
Event Log
Figure 60
Group Log
131
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span. For the Group Log select the wanted group. And click OK.
6
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. • The printing of the chosen log will start. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.
Note
Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log.
6.2.16 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. See Where to find the Event Log display on page 137 for more information. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. If they are not, the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process. 1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Eventlog. • A window appears with a request for a password.
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log.
132
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2.17 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP
• A window similar to the one shown here will appear.
4
To choose a group to configure tags in, use the trackball , point and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.
312401/B
133
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper,
right side of the window.
• A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. 6
Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag, and then click on the softbutton,Add. The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag. • The selected tag will then be shown on the left side.
7
When you have selected all the wanted tags, click OK. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups.
6.2.18 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP
• A window similar to the one shown here will appear.
4
Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball , point, and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.
134
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
5
The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. Click on the tag you want to remove, and click on the softbutton, Remove. • To add a tag, see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133, from point 5 to 7.
6
When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group, click OK. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed, do this same procedure again .
6.2.19 How to configure the Autolog 1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Auto Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.
312401/B
135
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog.
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
6.2.20 How to configure the Noonlog 1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Noon Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog.
136
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2.21 Where to find the Event Log display 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: EVENTLOG
• The events are displayed in form of a list.
6.2.22 How to display system information This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
312401/B
137
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.2.23 Access control system The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge, Mimics, Commissioning, Superuser and Password. Note
Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Acknowledge
This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. To activate and deactivate this function, do the following:
138
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge.
5
Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge, will now say Acknowledge off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
6
312401/B
If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton.
139
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Acknowledge off
Mimic
This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. It is used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally do not have access to. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4
140
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
5
Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Mimics, will now say Mimics off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
6
If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Mimics off softbutton.
Note
When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Mimics off.
Commissioning
This function allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened.
312401/B
141
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning.
5
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning, will now say Commissioning off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
6
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
Superuser
This function makes it possible to change alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
142
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser.
5
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser, will now say Superuser off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
6
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Superuser off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
312401/B
143
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Password
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password.
5
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Password, will now say Password off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
6
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Password off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
144
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2.24 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values, alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following: 1
Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 137.
2
At the upper right side on the System Information Display window, is a box with the text, Unit Display, beside it. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box.
3
Click on the Unit Display softbutton, or push the enter button. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown.
6.2.25 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3 4
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY.
Click on the softbutton called, Set, under the text Timezone. • A window appears with a request for a password.
312401/B
145
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Fill in the password. And click OK. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.
6
Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box.
7
Click OK.
Note
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made in the master clock.
6.2.26 How to change system time Note
Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3 4
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY.
Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. • A window appears with a request for a password.
146
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
5
Fill in the password. And click OK. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.
6
Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time. Then click on the OK softbutton. • The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.
Note
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made in the master clock.
6.2.27 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime.
6.2.28 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it. See Acknowledge on page 138 for more details.
6.2.29 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. See Mimic on page 140 for more details.
312401/B
147
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.2.30 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4
Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • A window appears with a request for a password.
5
Fill in the password.
6
Click on the OK softbutton. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed.
To activate the buzzer again, do the following: 1
Open the System Information Display if it is not already open.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear.
6.2.31 How to change tag parameters for a channel This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following:
148
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. Use the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup.
3
Double click on the line with the wanted tag. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed.
4
Double click on the parameter you want to change.
5
A window appears with a request for a password.
6
Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. • The display picture is updated, and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system.
Tag Details image on page 149 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. Figure 61
312401/B
Tag Details image
149
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. It is Tag Details, Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application. The following information is displayed by clicking on them: Tag Details
Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Enable, stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Disable, starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Value, allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. Advanced Tag Details
Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters. Tag Application
Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for: Analogue input channel parameters Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Tag number
Number
No
Unique number describing a tag
Description
Text
Yes
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
Value
Number
No
Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
No
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Type
Text
No
Analog/Digital
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
150
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Offscan value
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Limit Alarm Low Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Filter Time
Number
Yes
Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Band
Number
Yes
Report value dead band limit
Counts Low
Number
Yes
A/D minimum value
Counts High
Number
Yes
A/D maximum value
Eng. Units Low
Number
Yes
Instrument minimum value
Eng. Units High
Number
Yes
Instrument maximum value
Alarm On-Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm Off-Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm On-Delay2
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Alarm Off-Delay1
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Inhibit On-Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off-Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Digital input channel parameters Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Description
Text
No
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
State
Text
No
Input status after time delay
312401/B
151
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
No
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Type
Text
No
Analog/Digital
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Enable Event on Open
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event on Closed
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Inhibit On Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Al.Inhibit Src TagNo
Text
No
Refer to another Tag or Channel
Alarm On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Invert input
Yes/No
Yes
Invert input status
6.2.32 How to change Deviation parameters How to change limits.
This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking, and deviation from the corrected value. For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature.
152
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
• The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath, A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 153. Figure 62
A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display
4
Click on the limit you want to change. • A window is opened.
312401/B
5
Type in the new wanted value.
6
Click Ok.
153
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Use this procedure to change any value on this display. Note
When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked. How to make profile
The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways, automatic correction and manual correction. Automatic correction
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
4
Click on the text which says: AUTO. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.
5
Push the enter button. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction, and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders.
Manual correction
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
154
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Click on the text which says: MAN. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.
5
Use the trackball , point, and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397.
6.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: WATCHCALLING CONFIG.
6.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer Note
In order to set On duty engineer, the system must be in control watch. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.
312401/B
155
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty, use the trackball , point, and click on the thumbnail which says, 2ND ENG ON DUTY. • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen, the , a text with who is on duty is displayed.
4
To take the officer off duty again, click on the same thumbnail again.
6.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location Note
This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty. Refer to chapter How to set the On Duty engineer on page 155. The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station:
1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.
3
Click on the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH). • When the watch responsibility has been accepted, the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station.
156
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
On the Watch Bridge Unit:
1
Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit).
6.2.36 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station:
The softbuttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point and click on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example.) • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like.
312401/B
157
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Click on one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG (depending on who you want to call). • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.
4
To cancel the call, just click on the same thumbnail again.
On the Watch Bridge Unit:
The buttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1
Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). • The call indicator will be lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.
2
158
To cancel the call, push the same button again.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.2.37 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to be updated. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1
To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page .
2
Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP, and page 2 will appear.
3
Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced. • A similar window opens:
4
The different qualifications equals a number. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification.
5
Click on the OK softbutton. • The new qualification has now been set. And the text has changed to the selected qualification.
6.2.38 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty, the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive. What is Off Duty active
The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. What is Off Duty passive
312401/B
159
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). 1
To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page .
2
Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP, and page 2 will appear.
3
Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. (In this example, the Chief engineer is being replaced.) • A similar window opens:
4
The different modes equals a number. 1 is active and 0 is passive. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode.
5
Click on the OK softbutton. • The new mode has now been sat. And the text has changed.
6.2.39 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system. Note
This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station.
160
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Each panel has a unique serial number. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and the public areas. For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
3
Use the trackball , point, and click on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE . The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
4
Use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration.
5
Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. (In this example, the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened:
• On the right side of the screen, there is a definition of the groups. It may look like this:
312401/B
161
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6
Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to.
7
Click on the OK softbutton.
6.2.40 How to make your own short trend display Introduction to short trend
The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots. You can select any tag for plot presentation. You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. When the desired tags are selected, you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. If you select the current hour, the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference.
162
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 63
The short trend display
How to make your own short trend display
Do the following: 1
Push the HOME button at the control panel. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT TREND
312401/B
4
Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel.
5
Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up.
6
Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. If desired, use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown.
7
Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE.
163
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
8
Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags.
9
Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data.
If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting, there is an alternative way of doing this. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected. Use the trackball and click in this check box. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 228. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175. How to select time in the trend display
The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. If an hour is selected, the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. If the user selects current hour, the data is retrieved from the logging server instead, and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. Figure 64
The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected
Figure 65 selected
The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour
Do the following to select an hour:
164
1
Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour.
2
Left-click.
3
Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Note
The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys. How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display
Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area. Figure 66
Y-axis zoom and pan control
3 4
Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. It is also possible to select all the y-axis:
312401/B
165
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Click on the MENU softbutton.
2
A context menu is opend.
3
Select Y-Scale, by clicking on the text.
4
Select Select all plots, by clicking on the text.
5
To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.
How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display
The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. Figure 67
X-axis zoom and pan control
Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 68
Time display
How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display
It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points, a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value.
166
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 69
Plot point value
Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1
Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select View, by clicking on the text.
4
Select Points, to enable or disable displaying of plot points.
How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor
It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally, the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated. Do the following to switch the cursor on:
312401/B
1
Right click in the plot area to open the context menu.
2
Select Show cursor. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.
167
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 70
3
Cursor’s time position
Move the cursor to read values for other points: a
Move the cursor near the vertical cursor.
b
Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally.
c
Release the left button.
The values are now updated. How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display
It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. Figure 71
Display of x-axis grid-lines
Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines:
168
1
Position the cursor on the menu softbutton, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Select View, by clicking on the text.
4
Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines.
How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display
It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Figure 72
312401/B
Display of y-axis grid-lines
1
Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
169
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot.
4
Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot.
How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display
A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value, with a colour derived from the plot colour. Figure 73
Fill-to-base function
The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1
Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function. The base value is set to zero by default, but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base.
How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display
The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode. Digital, means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. This mode is best suited for digital values.
170
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
In the ‘interpolated’ mode, the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Figure 74
Digital and interpolated mode
Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode.
How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display
You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest.
312401/B
171
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 75
Annotation
Do the following to add an annotation: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label.
4
Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph.
How to remove a plot in the trend display
Do the following to remove a plot:
172
1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Select Remove to remove the plot.
How to save an image to the image repository
It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. 3 Left click to open the menu.
4
Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph.
How to display an image in the image repository
It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. 2 Left click to open the menu.
312401/B
173
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. Figure 76
4 5
Image Viewer
To display it, select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side. Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer.
How to preserve an hour in the trend display
It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more, the oldest data set is deleted. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year, MM month, DD day and HH hour. Do the following to preserve an hour: 1 Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. 3 Right click on the Menu softbutton.
174
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour.
How to load an preserved hour in the trend display
It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log. Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.
2
Click on the Menu softbutton.
3
Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu.
4
Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed.
How to preserve trend display settings manually
The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart. If you want to change the settings without saving your changes, it is possible to switch off the automatic saving, and save and load the display settings manually. Do the following to switch off the automatic saving:
312401/B
1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.
2
Right click on the Menu softbutton.
175
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Select Save automatically.
4
Select Save.
If you want to reload the setting again, press Load. If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph, select Clear all.
6.2.41 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend
The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. In addition, it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually, ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). To display the data, the long trend display is used. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel, where you can select between up to eight different graph views. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference.
176
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 77
The long trend display
How to operate the long trend display
The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 166 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 167 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 168 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 169 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 170 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 170 How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 171
312401/B
177
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 172 How to save an image to the image repository on page 173 How to configure a long trend
Do the following to configure a long trend 1
Push the Home button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND
178
4
Click on the Menu softbutton, to open the dialogue box below.
5
Select Long trend setup from the menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6
Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. Use filters as desired.
7
Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend.
8
Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags.
9
Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval.
10 To remove an entry from logging, select the tag in the Configured tags for long trend grid, and press Delete. Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 166. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175. How to load logged data in the long trend display
Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load.
If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. Please be aware that if this function is activated, it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Click on this button to reload the data.
312401/B
179
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.3 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) The image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP) is called the Navigator. To operate the TCP a finger is normally used, but a stylus similar to a fingertip is also a possibility. The TCP screen is divided in 2 parts, like the Navigator image. The Alarm Navigator is on the left side and the Graphic Display Navigator is on the right. See illustration, Navigator name definitions on page 180. Figure 78
Navigator name definitions
Note
The buttons on the Control Room Panel (CRP) are used to handle alarm events, please see How to handle alarm events on page 115,How to acknowledge alarms on page 116 ,and How alarms are printed after a black-out on page 116, for more information.
6.3.1 How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel The Touch Control Panel can be locked. When the TCP is locked, the only active part of the TCP is the Meny softbutton.
180
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Lock the TCP:
1
Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. It is located under the main groups, and on the right side of the thumbnails. • A window similar to the on shown here is displayed:
2
Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP:
• The TCP is now locked. Unlock the TCP:
1
Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. It is located under the main groups, and on the right side of the thumbnails. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP:
312401/B
181
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2
Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text. • The TCP is now unlocked.
6.3.2 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image displays all active and acknowledged alarms. Alarm Summary on page 182 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image. Figure 79
Alarm Summary
Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm summary:
182
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY. • A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display.
3
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons (on the CRP) to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
6.3.3 How to display alarm history The alarm history image displays all alarm events chronological. The newest alarms are displayed on top. Alarm History on page 183 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. Figure 80
Alarm History
Do the following to display alarm history:
312401/B
183
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY.
3
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
6.3.4 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup.
2
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.
3
For more details on one tag, double click on the line with the wanted tag.
6.3.5 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do the following:
184
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY. • The system counters are now displayed. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys.
3
Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change. Click on the digit. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed.
4
Type in the wanted value, and click Yes to confirm.
6.3.6 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following: 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS
• Offscan tags are displayed. 3
312401/B
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used.
185
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.3.7 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup.
2
Use the trackball and right click anywhere on the screen. • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.
3
Right click on the grey box, and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display.
6.3.8 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place, it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk or night viewing. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
186
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Monitor Dimmer Functions
The monitor can be adjusted to day palette, dawn palette and night palette. The TCP is simultaneously adjusted when this function is used. 1
Use the trackball and click on the option button beside the wanted palette. The change is visible at once.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP, INP, ALC and TCP, without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. Just set the wanted monitor palette, and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. Lamp intensity Function
This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP). 1
Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 7 will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
Touch Display intensity
This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP.
312401/B
187
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 100 % will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
Backlight intensity
This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). 1
Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 100 % will give the brightest light.
2
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
6.3.9 Screen saver On Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off, and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
188
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Use the trackball and click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function.
4
Fill in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on.
5
To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.
6.3.10 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. 1
At the lower, left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on this icon. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
2
Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. If not, use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. • The screen dump is now saved.
312401/B
189
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.3.11 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the softbutton called: MENY, on the TCP. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
2
Touch the text : Clear HISTORY..
3
Choose your favourite thumbnails just by touching once on them. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails.) The first you touch will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group, Favorites, are displayed.
4
Touch once more on the MENY softbutton. • The same window, like the one in item 2, will appear.
5
This time, touch on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group, Favorites.
6.3.12 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. This printer will have a defined function, either as an alarm printer or a log printer. If it is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both functions. Note
A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. See the list of logs underneath. List of the Miscellaneous Logs
• Alarm Summary Log (standard)
190
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
• Alarm History Log (standard) • Offscan tags Log (standard) • Inhibited tags Log (standard) • Alarm Log (standard) • Group Log (standard) • Selected points Log (standard) • Autolog (standard) • Noonlog (standard) • Complete Log (standard) • Event Log (standard) • Counters Log (option) • Tank Log (option) • Level & Draft Correction Log (option) • API Log (option) • Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. Except from the Selected Points log, Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. The printing procedure for the Event Log, Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Note
The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. See How to configure the Autolog on page 199, and How to configure the Noonlog on page 199. Note
Before printing a selected Points Log, the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196. Note
To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 195.
312401/B
191
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to print: Alarm Summary Log , Inhibited tags log, Alarm log, Complete log, Counters log, Tank Log, Level & Draft Correction Log, API Log, Ullage Log and Custom Log
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called:MISC LOGS • A window similar to the one underneath appears.
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm Summary Log)
4
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. • The printing of the chosen log will start. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.
192
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
How to print: Alarm History Log, Event Log and Group Log
1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS
• A window similar to the one underneath appears.
3
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm History Log)
See Alarm History Log on page 195, Event Log on page 195and Group Log on page 195 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs.
312401/B
193
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
194
Figure 81
Alarm History Log
Figure 82
Event Log
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 83
Group Log
4
For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span. For the Group Log select the wanted group. And click OK.
5
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. • The printing of the chosen log will start. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.
Note
Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log.
6.3.13 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. See Where to find the Event Log display on page 200 for more information. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. If they are not, the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process.
312401/B
195
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Eventlog. • A window appears with a request for a password.
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log.
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
6.3.14 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following: 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP
• A window similar to the one shown here will appear.
196
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
To choose a group to configure tags in, use the trackball , point and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.
4
Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper,
right side of the window.
• A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. 5
Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag, and then click on the softbutton,Add. The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag. • The selected tag will then be shown on the left side.
6
When you have selected all the wanted tags, click OK. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups.
6.3.15 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group. 1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP
• A window similar to the one shown here will appear.
312401/B
197
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball , point, and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.
4
The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. Click on the tag you want to remove, and click on the softbutton, Remove. • To add a tag, see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196, from point 5 to 7.
5
When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group, click OK. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed, do this same procedure again .
198
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.3.16 How to configure the Autolog 1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Auto Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog.
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
6.3.17 How to configure the Noonlog 1
Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Noon Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.
312401/B
199
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog.
4
Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.
5
Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.
6.3.18 Where to find the Event Log display 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: EVENTLOG • The events are displayed in form of a list.
6.3.19 How to display system information This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP
• A window, like the one underneath, will appear.
200
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.3.20 Access control system The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge, Mimics, Commissioning, Superuser and Password. Note
Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Acknowledge
This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. To activate and deactivate this function, do the following:
312401/B
201
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.
3
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge.
4
Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge, will now say Acknowledge off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
5
If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton.
Note
When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Acknowledge off
202
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Mimic
This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. It is used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally don’t have access to. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.
3
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics.
4
Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Mimics, will now say Mimics off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
5
312401/B
If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Mimics off softbutton.
203
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Mimics off.
Commissioning
This function allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.
3
204
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning, will now say Commissioning off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
5
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
Superuser
This function makes it possible to change alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY.
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 3
312401/B
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser.
205
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser, will now say Superuser off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
5
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Superuser off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
Password
1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY.
• The System Information Display window will now be opened.
206
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password.
4
Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Password, will now say Password off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.
5
If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Password off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.
Note
Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.
6.3.21 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values, alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:
312401/B
207
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 200.
2
At the upper right side on the System Information Display window, is a box with the text, Unit Display, beside it. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box.
3
Click on the Unit Display softbutton, or push the enter button. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown.
6.3.22 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. 1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY.
• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 3
Click on the softbutton called, Set, under the text Timezone. • A window appears with a request for a password.
4
Fill in the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.
208
5
Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box.
6
Click OK.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Note
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made in the master clock.
6.3.23 How to change system time Note
Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.
3
Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. • A window appears with a request for a password.
4
Fill in the password. And click OK. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.
312401/B
209
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time. Then click on the OK softbutton. • The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.
Note
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made in the master clock.
6.3.24 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime.
6.3.25 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it. See Acknowledge on page 201 for more details.
6.3.26 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. See Mimic on page 203 for more details.
210
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.3.27 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.
3
Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • A window appears with a request for a password.
4
Fill in the password.
5
Click on the OK softbutton. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed.
To activate the buzzer again, do the following: 1
Open the System Information Display if it is not already open.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear.
6.3.28 How to change tag parameters for a channel This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following:
312401/B
211
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup.
2
Use the trackball , point and double click on the line with the wanted tag. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed.
3
Double click on the parameter you want to change.
4
A window appears with a request for a password.
5
Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. • The display picture is updated, and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system.
Tag Details image on page 212 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. Figure 84
Tag Details image
There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. It is Tag Details, Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application. The following information is displayed by clicking on them: Tag Details
212
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Enable, stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Disable, starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Value, allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. Advanced Tag Details
Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters. Tag Application
Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for: Analogue input channel parameters Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Tag number
Number
No
Unique number describing a tag
Description
Text
Yes
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
Value
Number
No
Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
No
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Type
Text
No
Analog/Digital
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
312401/B
213
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Offscan value
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Limit Alarm Low Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Filter Time
Number
Yes
Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Band
Number
Yes
Report value dead band limit
Counts Low
Number
Yes
A/D minimum value
Counts High
Number
Yes
A/D maximum value
Eng. Units Low
Number
Yes
Instrument minimum value
Eng. Units High
Number
Yes
Instrument maximum value
Alarm On-Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm Off-Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm On-Delay2
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Alarm Off-Delay1
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Inhibit On-Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off-Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Digital input channel parameters Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Description
Text
No
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
State
Text
No
Input status after time delay
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
No
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
214
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Enable Event on Open
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event on Closed
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Inhibit On Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Alarm On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
Signal Cond On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Signal Cond Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Signal Cond Invert
Yes/No
Yes
Invert input status
6.3.29 How to change Deviation parameters How to change limits.
This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking, and deviation from the corrected value. For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature. 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
• The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath, A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 216.
312401/B
215
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 85
A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display
3
Use the trackball and click on the limit you want to change. • A window is opened.
4
Type in the new wanted value.
5
Click Ok.
Use this procedure to change any value on this display. Note
When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked. How to make profile
The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all
216
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways, automatic correction and manual correction. Automatic correction
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
3
Use the trackball and click on the text which says: AUTO. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.
4
Push the enter button. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction, and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders.
Manual correction
1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C
3
Use the trackball and click on the text which says: MAN. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.
4
Use the trackball , point, and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397.
312401/B
217
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.3.30 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: WATCHCALLING CONFIG
6.3.31 How to set the On Duty engineer Note
In order to set On duty engineer, the system must be in control watch. 1
Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.
2
If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty, just touch the thumbnail which says, 2ND ENG ON DUTY. • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen, the , a text with who is on duty is displayed.
3
To take the officer off duty again, click on the same thumbnail again.
6.3.32 How to select the Watch Responsible location Note
This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty. Refer to chapter on page .
218
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station:
1
Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.
2
Touch the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH). • When the watch responsibility has been accepted, the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station.
On the Watch Bridge Unit:
1
Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit).
6.3.33 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station:
The softbuttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1
312401/B
Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example.)
219
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like.
2
Touch one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG(depending on who you want to call). • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.
3
To cancel the call, just touch the same thumbnail again.
On the Watch Bridge Unit:
The buttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1
Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). • The call indicator will be lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.
2
220
To cancel the call, push the same button again.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.3.34 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to be updated. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1
To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapterHow to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218.
2
Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP, and page 2 will appear.
3
Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced. • A similar window opens:
4
The different qualifications equals a number. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification.
5
Click on the OK softbutton. • The new qualification has now been set. And the text has changed to the selected qualification.
6.3.35 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty, the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive. What is Off Duty active
The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. What is Off Duty passive
312401/B
221
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). 1
To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter How to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218.
2
Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP, and page 2 will appear.
3
Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. (In this example, the Chief engineer is being replaced.) • A similar window opens:
4
The different modes equals a number. 1 is active and 0 is passive. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode.
5
Click on the OK softbutton. • The new mode has now been sat. And the text has changed.
6.3.36 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system.
222
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Note
This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station. Each panel has a unique serial number. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and the public areas. For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty. 1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
3
Use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration.
4
Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. (In this example, the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened:
• On the right side of the screen, there is a definition of the groups. It may look like this:
312401/B
223
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to.
6
Click on the OK softbutton.
6.3.37 How to make your own short trend display Introduction to short trend
The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots. You can select any tag for plot presentation. You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings will be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. When the desired tags are selected, you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. If you select the current hour, the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference.
224
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 86
The short trend display
How to make your own short trend display
Do the following: 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT TREND
312401/B
3
Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel.
4
Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up.
5
Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. If desired, use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown.
6
Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE.
7
Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags. .
8
Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data.
225
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting, there is an alternative way of doing this. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected. Use the trackball and click in this check box. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page . Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237. How to select time in the trend display
The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. If an hour is selected, the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. If the user selects current hour, the data is retrieved from the logging server instead, and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. Figure 87
The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected
Figure 88 selected
The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour
Do the following to select an hour: 1
Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour.
2
Left-click.
3
Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph.
Note
The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys.
226
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display
Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area. Figure 89
Y-axis zoom and pan control
3 4
Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. It is also possible to select all the y-axis: 1 Click on the MENU softbutton. 2 A context menu is opened. 3 Select Y-Scale, by clicking on the text. 4 Select Select all plots, by clicking on the text.
312401/B
227
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.
How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display
The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. Figure 90
X-axis zoom and pan control
Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 91
Time display
How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display
It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points, a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value.
228
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 92
Plot point value
Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1
Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select View, by clicking on the text.
4
Select Points, to enable or disable displaying of plot points.
How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor
It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally, the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated. Do the following to switch the cursor on:
312401/B
1
Right click in the plot area to open the context menu.
2
Select Show cursor. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.
229
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 93
3
Cursor’s time position
Move the cursor to read values for other points: a
Move the cursor near the vertical cursor.
b
Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally.
c
Release the left button.
The values are now updated. How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display
It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. Figure 94
Display of x-axis grid-lines
Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines:
230
1
Position the cursor on the menu softbutton, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Select View, by clicking on the text.
4
Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines.
How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display
It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Figure 95
312401/B
Display of y-axis grid-lines
1
Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
231
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot.
4
Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot.
How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display
A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value, with a colour derived from the plot colour. Figure 96
Fill-to-base function
The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1
Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball .
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function. The base value is set to zero by default, but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base.
How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display
The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode. Digital, means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. This mode is best suited for digital values.
232
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
In the ‘interpolated’ mode, the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Figure 97
Digital and interpolated mode
Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode.
How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display
You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest.
312401/B
233
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 98
Annotation
Do the following to add an annotation: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
3
Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label.
4
Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph.
How to remove a plot in the trend display
Do the following to remove a plot:
234
1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want.
2
Right click to open the context menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
3
Select Remove to remove the plot.
How to save an image to the image repository
It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. 3 Right click to open the menu.
4
Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph.
How to display an image in the image repository
It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. 2 Left click to open the menu.
312401/B
235
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. Figure 99
Image Viewer
4
To display it, select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side.
5
Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer.
How to preserve an hour in the trend display
It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more, the oldest data set is deleted. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year, MM month, DD day and HH hour. Do the following to preserve an hour:
236
1
Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel.
2
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.
3
Right click on the Menu softbutton.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
4
Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour.
How to load an preserved hour in the trend display
It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log. Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1
Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.
2
Right click on the Menu softbutton.
3
Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu.
4
Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed.
How to preserve trend display settings manually
The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart. If you want to change the settings without saving your changes, it is possible to switch off the automatic saving, and save and load the display settings manually.
312401/B
237
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Do the following to switch off the automatic saving: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. 2 Right click on the Menu softbutton.
3
Select Save automatically.
4 You can then operate the Save menu item. If you want to reload the setting again, press Load. If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph, select Clear all.
6.3.38 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend
The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. In addition, it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually, ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). To display the data, the long trend display is used. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel, where you can select between up to eight different graph views. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart.
238
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. Figure 100
The long trend display
How to operate the long trend display
The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 228 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 229 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 230 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 231 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 232 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 232
312401/B
239
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 233 How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 234 How to save an image to the image repository on page 235 How to configure a long trend
Do the following to configure a long trend 1
Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY on the TCP. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
2
Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND
240
3
Click on the Menu softbutton, to open the dialogue box below.
4
Select Long trend setup from the menu.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
5
Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. Use filters as desired.
6
Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend.
7
Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags.
8
Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval.
9
To remove an entry from logging, select the tag in the
Configured tags for long trend grid, and press Delete.
Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page . Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237. How to load logged data in the long trend display
Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load.
If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. Please be aware that if this function is activated, it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Click on this button to reload the data.
312401/B
241
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.4 MOS operational procedures 6.4.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: • The buzzer is activated • The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display • External alarm devices such as engine room horns are activated • The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the bottom of the display Do the following to handle the alarm: 1
Push Sound off to turn audible alarms off. • This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.
2
Push the ACK button. • This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the display (the last incoming alarm). • This alarm text disappears.
3
Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next alarm and so on until no alarms are unacknowledged.
4
Attend to the alarm situation.
6.4.2 How to display alarm history Figure 101
242
Typical alarm history display
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3
Push 1 to display the Alarm History.
4
Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time.
5
Push ENTER to display alarm details.
6.4.3 How to display alarm summary 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3
Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.
4
Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time.
5
Push ENTER to display alarm details.
6.4.4 How to display alarm group information
312401/B
1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3
Push 3 to display the Alarm Group Information.
4
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select an alarm group.
243
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Push ENTER.
6
Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag group.
7
Push ENTER to display alarm details.
6.4.5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen
3
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the item you want to change.
Colour palette 4
Push ENTER.
5
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select Day, Night or Dawn.
6
Push ENTER.
Keyboard click 7
Push ENTER.
8
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select On or Off.
9
Push ENTER.
Keyboard light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 11 Push ENTER.
244
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Screen brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 13 Push ENTER.
6.4.6 About password access An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available as follows: 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 3 to display the User Access menu. • The user access levels are displayed. – On: Indicates that access at this level is possible – Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.
Note
Only one user access level can be selected at a time. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information. • User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures. Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally don’t have access to, such as for instance operating the power management from the cargo control room. • Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes. • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes.
312401/B
245
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
Do not leave the system while Commissioning or Superuser password access is available, as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Note
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.
6.4.7 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details Distributed Processing Units are often abbreviated DPUs. 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 6 to display the DPU Overview.
3
Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all DPUs one page at a time.
4
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through each DPU one at a time.
5
For information about the tags for a particular DPU, select the DPU and push ENTER.
6
Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag.
Tag details view 7
246
Push ENTER to display the parameters for a particular tag.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 102
Tag details display
Tag menu When the tags for a DPU is displayed: 8
Push MENU. • The Tag Menu is displayed. This menu allows you to display various information about each tag as follows:
9
Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag →Tag Details.
10 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use the function keys to operate the tag when available. 11 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any). 12 Push 4 to set the selected tag as the Start Tag. 13 Push 5 to go to the main menu.
6.4.8 How to change tag parameters This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points.
312401/B
1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 6 to display the DPU Overview.
247
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Use the Page down and Page up buttons and/or the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the DPU you want.
4
Push ENTER.
5
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the tag you want to change parameters for.
6
Push ENTER to display the parameters for the selected tag.
7
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the parameter you want to change. • Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows a parameter to be changed: – Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current access level setting. – White parameter text: Parameter can be changed.
Note
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it. 8
Push ENTER. • A parameter entry window is displayed.
9
248
Clear the existing value using the CLR button.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
10 Type in the new value. Note
A red text indicates that you have typed an illegal value. If you make an error push ESC to cancel the input.
11 Push ENTER. • The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and other Midi Operator Stations and Operator Stations in the system. Analogue input tag parameters
The following table explains what the different parameters for analogue input tags are used for. Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Tag number
Number
No
Unique number describing a tag
Description
Text
Yes
Description of a tag
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
Yes
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Type
Text
No
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Offscan value
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Limit Alarm Low Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
312401/B
249
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Limit Alarm Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Filter Time
Number
Yes
Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Band
Number
Yes
Report value dead band limit
Counts Low
Number
Yes
A/D minimum value
Counts High
Number
Yes
A/D maximum value
Eng. Units Low
Number
Yes
Instrument minimum value
Eng. Units High
Number
Yes
Instrument maximum value
Alarm Off-Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay1
Number
Yes
High/Low delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay2
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay2
Number
Yes
HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Digital input tag parameters
The following table explains what the different parameters for digital input tags are used for. Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Description
Text
No
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
State
Text
No
Input status after time delay
Distributed Processing Unit number
Number
No
Unique number of the node
Channel number
Number
No
Number of the channel connected
Channel type
Number
No
Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Type
Text
No
Analog/Digital
Control Room Panel alarm group
Number
Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups
Bridge group
Number
Yes
All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups
250
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Function
Autolog
Number
Yes
Included in the autolog list
Noonlog
Number
Yes
Included in the noonlog list
Eventlog
Number
Yes
Included in the eventlog list
Offscan
Number
Yes
Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag
Text
No
Tag to inhibit this channel
Access group
Number
Yes
Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm
Enable Event on Open
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event on Closed
Yes/No
Yes
Enable/disable event
Inhibit On Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Inhibit Off Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay in 1 second
Al.Inhibit Src TagNo
Text
No
Refer to another Tag or Channel
Alarm On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
Alarm Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 1 second
On Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Off Delay
Number
Yes
Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second
Invert input
Yes/No
Yes
Invert input status
6.4.9 How to change alarm limits Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247.
6.4.10 How to change alarm delay Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247.
312401/B
251
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6.5 Watch Calling system operational procedures 6.5.1 How to receive a call When you receive a call, one of the watch location buttons is flashing. 1
Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call. • Button texts on buttons used to receive the call will vary.
6.5.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and the alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do the following: 1
Push SOUND OFF.
2
Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive the alarm indicator and take appropriate action.
3
After a while, check that the alarm is no longer displayed on the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.
6.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer 1
Push the CALL XXX button (button texts will vary) to notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge. • The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer has acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.
2
To terminate the call push the button again.
6.5.4 How to transfer watch responsibility 1
Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility. • The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is acknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watch responsibility has been transferred
252
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility 1
When the indicator for your location begins to flash, push the button for your watch location. • This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch responsibility to you.
6.5.6 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as either active or passive. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations. Off Duty ACTIVE
The panel will not sound alarms, but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions. Off Duty PASSIVE
The panel will not sound alarms. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark. Figure 103
Watch Bridge Unit controls
6.5.7 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as either active or passive. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations. Off Duty ACTIVE
The panel will not sound alarms, but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions. Off Duty PASSIVE
The panel will not sound alarms.
312401/B
253
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
254
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.6 ShipViewer operational procedures 6.6.1 Main ShipViewer functions The ShipViewer has the following main functions: • Counter display • Alarm displays • DPU displays • Deviation displays • Alarm group displays • Alarm summery displays • Alarm history displays • Selected points display • Selected trend display • Selected bargraph display • Mimic diagrams as found in the Operator Station
6.6.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display Overview
All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar. The most frequently used functions are also directly available through the toolbar buttons. These are further described in the following. Figure 104
ShipViewer menu and toolbar
Toolbar buttons
Print screen Save image to disk Print preview
312401/B
255
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Open image file Display version and build information Previous window Next window (after having used a previous window) Alarm summary display Alarm history display Alarm group display Running hours display DPU display Deviation display
Colour codes for data displays
The channel data is colour coded as follows: • Green: The channel is in a normal state • Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged • Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged • Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state • Blue: The channel is inhibited • Orange: Not updated or invalid values The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. Dark blue is better when viewing some coloured texts, while white is better for printing. 1
256
Select Settings in the menu bar, and then either Select or Clear →No background colour.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.6.3 Explanation of ShipViewer displays Alarm summary display
The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries. Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not displayed. The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time. Alarm group display
The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the pre-defined alarm groups. These group where defined during commissioning of the K-Chief 500. When selecting the alarm group display, a dialogue containing all alarm groups appears on the screen. In this dialogue all alarm groups with active alarms are indicated by a red dot. 1
Select an alarm group by clicking on its softbutton.
2
To switch between the alarm group view and group view, click on the Alarm Display/Group Display softbutton (down to the left) repeatedly. • The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.
Alarm history display
The alarm history display shows active alarms and alarms returned to normal. 1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. • The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time. Counter display
The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such components as pumps, generators, engines etc. included in the counter system of the K-Chief 500. Distributed Processing Unit display
The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all measuring points connected to each DPU. 1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.
312401/B
257
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Deviation display
The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines having deviation calculations in the K-Chief 500. 1
Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.
Selected points display
The selected points display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to 20 tags. Note
More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection: 1
In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display.
2
Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected points display is shown.
Make or alter tag selection: 1
In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display.
2
Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected points display is shown.
3
Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed.
4
Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
5
Select tags and push Add. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twenty tags.
6
Click OK.
Selected trend display
The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to eight tags.
258
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Note
More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. 2 Select one of the five groups and clickOK. • The selected trend display is shown. 3 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time. 4 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. 5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected trend display is shown. 3 Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. 4 Select a system under Select. 5 Select tags and push Add. • The selected trend display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to eight tags. 6 Click OK. 7 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time. 8 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. 9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. Selected bargraph display
The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph display pages containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to twelve tags. Note
More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection:
312401/B
259
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected bargraph display is shown. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected bargraph display is shown. 3 Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. 4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system. 5 Select tags and click Add. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twelve tags. 6 Click OK. Mimic diagrams
All mimic diagrams found in the Operator Station are available through the ShipViewer. The number and design of these mimic diagrams are ship dependent. 1 Click on the Mimics button on menu bar. 2 Select a mimic diagram from the drop down list. Figure 105
ShipViewer mimics
6.6.4 How to print displayed information Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the colour graphics display: 1 Select Settings→No background colour.
260
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
• This reduces the amount of ink used when printing. 2
Click on the Print icon in the tool bar.
Figure 106
ShipViewer settings menu
6.6.5 How to save ShipViewer images Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour graphics display: 1
Click on the Save icon in the tool bar. • A standard “file save” dialogue is displayed.
2
Enter file name and a location and click Save.
3
Use any program for handling pictures or bitmaps to view the file.
Figure 107
ShipViewer save dialogue (typical)
6.6.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files Use the following procedure to view a previously saved image: 1
312401/B
Click on the Open icon in the tool bar.
261
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• A standard “file open” dialogue is displayed. 2
Select file name and a location and click Open. • The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft program for viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.
Figure 108
262
ShipViewer open file dialogue (typical)
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
6.7 ME monitoring operational procedures 6.7.1 ME monitoring overview mimic The Main engine monitoring overview mimic gives you full access to all subsystems in your configuration. It provides easy access to alarm view and easy detection of the position where the alarm occurs. Figure 109
ME monitoring overview mimic
6.7.2 Bearing Wear Engine overview mimic
The navigator button Bearing Wear will open the overview mimic. This mimic has links to detailed information mimics of Bearing Wear Monitoring, Bearing Wear Monitoring information and bearing temperature measuring points. To give the user a better overview of installed equipment and a fast overview of the condition; there is a cross-section drawing of the engine showing where the sensor/measuring points are. Status of these points is shown with colours.
312401/B
263
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 110
Engine overview mimic function
Bearing Wear monitoring mimic
When the operator selects WEAR through the Engine overview mimic, the navigator will open the Bearing Wear monitoring mimic. This mimic contains detailed information regarding the Bearing Wear monitoring system, as follows: • BWM sensor deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM cylinder deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM average sensor value alarm showing as a square around bar graph for BWM sensor deviation • Bearing Wear sensor temperature shown as text • Status RUN: indicating when system is sending out new values and that engine is protected with alarm • Bar graph scale: ± 1.00 [mm]
264
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 111
Bearing wear monitoring mimic function
System overview mimic
This mimic indicates which part of the system that has a failure alarm. If any bearing wear sensor fails, this will be displayed by the mimics. The System overview mimic shows the topology and display, as well where sensors are connected. Figure 112
312401/B
Bearing Wear system overview mimic
265
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Dynamic alarm limits
To avoid unnecessary/false bearing wear alarms, the bearing wear monitoring system is build up with dynamics alarm limits. Dependent upon system conditions, the alarm system will change alarm limits accordingly. Sensor deviation alarm limits have two value sets, which depends
on condition. LL
L
H
HH
Normal operation and all sensors OK
–0.5
–0.3
0.3
0.5
mm
Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved
–0.7
–0.5
0.5
0.7
mm
LL L H HH -0.5 -0.3 0.3 0.5 mm -0.7 -0.5 0.5 0.7 mm Cylinder deviation alarm limits have two value sets. Default
values are given below. LL
L
H
HH
Normal operation and all sensors OK
–0.3
0.3
mm
Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved
–5.0
5.0
mm
Note
Limit = ±5.0 disables any alarm. The Learning mode is only activated during first 500 hours running of the Main Engine. The intention of this mode is that the system after 500 running hours will download final data to sensors. The average sensor value alarm limit has in normal mode L/H-alarm = ±0.5 mm and LL/HH-alarm = ±0.7 regardless the condition of wear sensors. If the system is in learning mode, no alarms are generated. How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters
All adjustments regarding bearing wear monitoring system are available on Tag Details for Bearing Wear tag (CYL0x-AVE-S).
266
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 113
Tag Detail image of Bearing Wear tag
The following table explains what the different parameters for bearing wear tag are used for: Parameter name
Type
Adjust.
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Number
No
Unique number describing a tag
Tag description
Text
No
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
Value
Number
No
Calculated value
RPM input tag
Number
No
Tag reference
BWM mode
Number
No
Tag reference
Cylinder dev. tag
Number
No
Tag reference
Fore sensor dev tag
Number
No
Tag reference
Aft sensor dev tag
Number
No
Tag reference
Sensors aft input tags
Number
No
Tag reference to data container
Sensors fore input tags
Number
No
Tag reference to data container
Max diff F_A
Number
Yes
Max allowed difference between sensors in deviation filter
Gain
Number
Yes
Gain for deviation filter
Bearing no
Number
No
Bearing number / cylinder number
Sub type
Number
No
Functional sub-type
Tag number
312401/B
Function
267
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Dependant upon the condition of bearing wear system, events will be generated. The following table explains different events for bearing wear tag. Based on these events, alarm dynamic limits will adjust automatically. Event
Type
Function
E1 : Fore sensor deviation abnormal
Bit
Use largest alarm limits for fore deviation alarm
E2 : Aft sensor deviation abnormal
Bit
Use largest alarm limits for aft deviation alarm
E3 : Cylinder sensor deviation abnormal
Bit
Block alarms for cylinder deviation
Sensor System Failure
Each sensor has a system failure tag, and failure will be displayed as a value. This value is a code depending of type of fails sensor is reporting. The following table describes the type of system failure for bearing wear sensors: Value 0
268
Tag Details - failure description Normal
101
Chan 1 Sensor Break
102
Chan 1 Sensor P Overload
103
Chan 1 Sensor N Overload
201
Chan 2 Sensor Break
202
Chan 2 Sensor P Overload
203
Chan 2 Sensor N Overload
301
Chan 3 Sensor Break
302
Chan 3 Sensor P Overload
303
Chan 3 Sensor N Overload
401
Chan 4 Sensor Break
402
Chan 4 Sensor P Overload
403
Chan 4 Sensor N Overload
501
Device Sensor Break
502
Device Sensor P Overload
503
Device Sensor N Overload
507
Checksum Error in NVRAM
508
Checksum Error in PROGRAM
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Long Trend Logging
The main purpose of the long term log is documentation to classification societies that no wear has occurred. This log will give a good overview if there exists a slow progressing wear that can be repaired before it becomes critical. The following data is logged per cylinder: • TAGS – Sensor value FORE – Sensor value AFT – Average sensor value – Sensor deviation FORE – Sensor deviation AFT – Cylinder value • Type of value – Maximum value – Minimum value – Average value Data will be stored on: c:\ros\pdslog\BWlog\LongTermData
Each cylinder will have its own file: Cylxx-yyyy.csv
where xx is the number of the cylinder and yyyy the year. A new log file will be started each year. These files can be copied and be opened in an Excel sheet. The following information is available in this file: • Heading • Sample time The first line is the heading. Each tag name shows up 3 times. First the average value, then minimum and maximum: CYL01-AVE-S;CYL01-AVE-S min;CYL01-AVE-S max;......
The first column is the sample time: 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;.......
The values are separated by semicolons, which makes it easy to open the file in Microsoft Excel: 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.446;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.446;...
312401/B
269
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.175;0.396;-0.335;0.349;...
Short Trend Alarm Logging
When a bearing wear alarm occurs (sensor deviation, cylinder deviation or sensor average), a preserved short trend alarm log will be stored. Values for all tags related to the bearing wear system will be stored. Data is preserved for 23 hours before the alarm and 1 hour after the alarm. This will be stored on c:\ros\Pdslog\BWlog\Preserved
and saved in separate folders. The name of the folder is given by the date and time when the alarm occurs. It is possible to trend a preserved alarm folder. All details regarding the use of short trend displays are described in How to make your own short trend display on page 162. To be able to trend preserved data, the correct folder has to be selected, as shown below: Figure 114 Short trend display, selection of preserved folder (24 h log data)
A new display appears, where the requested folder to trend log data is selected, as shown below:
270
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 115
Short trend display – select a folder
6.7.3 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) The background for this function is to avoid problems with scuffing inside cylinders (piston wall). Fluctuating temperatures of the cylinder liners is an indication of scuffing. To be able to check scuffing conditions, the system stores a number of samples and calculates the difference between the largest and the lowest cylinder liner temperature within the set of samples. This is the maximum fluctuation in the temperature. By exceeding the alarm limit, the system will generate an alarm. The calculation of fluctuation is performed continuously on each cylinder liner temperature sensor. The highest and lowest liner temperature is detected in the set of samples. The fluctuation in the temperature is the difference between these two temperatures. The fluctuation is re-calculated every time the oldest sample is replaced with a new sample. The system will also generate an alarm if the fluctuation calculated for this temperature is greater than the alarm high-high limit, compared with the mean value for this engine. Fluctuating alarm – alarm high
An alarm is activated if the difference between the smallest sample and the largest sample is more than acceptable.
312401/B
271
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Fluctuating deviation alarm – alarm high high (scuffing)
This liner temperatures fluctuation is compared with the mean fluctuation of all liner temperatures of this engine. There can be more than one liner temperature measurement to each cylinder. An alarm is activated if the difference between this fluctuating and the mean fluctuating is larger than the alarm high-high limit. Activate priming
The alarm high-high situation (deviation alarm) will activate the priming relay. This can be used for activating priming for the actual cylinder. Blocking
The alarms are not calculated if blocking is activated by the blocking input reference or the liner temperature is below inhibit low limit. The following conditions will disable alarm monitoring and priming: • Cylinder liner temp below low limit • Cylinder liner temp above high limit • Blocking tag with tag value below blocking limit Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic
When the operator selects the Cylinder Liner Temperature mimic, the navigator will open the monitoring mimic. This mimic contents the following detailed information regarding Cylinder liner monitoring: • Cylinder liner temperature shown in text and bar graph • Cylinder liner deviation temperature in text • Fluctuate temperature • Fluctuate deviation high high alarm (scuffing) • Mean cylinder liner temperature • Mean fluctuating temperature
272
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Figure 116
Short Cylinder liner temperature mimics
How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters
All adjustments regarding fluctuate monitoring tag are available on the Tag Detail parameter display. Figure 117
Tag Detail image of fluctuate monitoring tag
The following table explains what the different parameters for fluctuate monitoring tag are used for:
312401/B
273
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Parameter name
Type
Adjust.
Tag name
Text
No
Unique code describing a tag
Number
No
Unique number describing a tag
Tag description
Text
No
Description of a tag
Function
Text
No
Short code describing the function of the tag
Value
Number
No
Calculated value
Sample time
Number
Yes
Time between each sample within a set of samples [0.1 sec] Enter 20 (twenty) to get a 2 second time between the samples
Max value
Number
Yes
Maximum accepted cylinder liner temperature Values above this are rejected [0.1 deg C] Enter 4000 (four thousand) get a 400 (four hundred) deg C limit
Low limit
Number
Yes
Lowest cylinder liner temperature where this tag type can be active Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also note the inhibit tag reference [0.1 deg C] Enter 500 (five hundred) get a 50 (fifty) deg C limit
Dead band scuffing alarm
Number
Yes
The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated scuffing alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high limit [0.1 deg C] Enter 20 to get a 2 deg C dead band
Dead band deviation alarm
Number
Yes
The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated deviation alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high-high limit [0.1 deg C]
Samples
Number
Yes
Number of temperature samples in each calculation Enter 60 to keep 60 samples in the calculation
Inhibit treshold value
Number
Yes
Minimum value in inhibit tags value for being active This parameter is zero if the inhibit tag is binary Enter 400 to get a 40 RPM limit
Text
No
The tag reference to the cylinder liner sensor Note the alarm high description
Tag number
Cylinder liner temperature
274
Function
312401/B
Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System
Parameter name
Type
Adjust.
Fluctuating mean value
Text
No
The reference to the tag holding the mean value of the fluctuation in all cylinder liner temperatures of this engine Note the alarm high-high description Insert zero to de-activate this functionality
Inhibit tag
Text
No
ME running or other binary source The calculations are stopped and any alarm is reset if inhibit is activated Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also see the calculation low limit parameter (T3)
Primer tag
Text
No
Reference to an output tag / source for starting of priming of dedicated cylinder Activated by alarm high-high Insert a tag reference to activate the primer functionality / relay Disabled by blocking / inhibit
312401/B
Function
275
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
7 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM 7.1 Overview The Bridge Watch Monitoring System is designed to monitor bridge activity and alert the master or other qualified navigators if the bridge becomes unattended. The system first alerts the officer of the watch through local alarm indication at the bridge unit, and if he/she is not responding, then alerts the master or other qualified officer. The system conforms to the requirements of IMO resolution MCS.128(75) Performance standards for a Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) and the bridge class notations for ”one-man bridge operation”.
7.2 BWMS operational procedures 7.2.1 Normal use of the BWMS The purpose of Bridge Watch Monitoring is to continuously confirm that the bridge is attended. 1
To confirm that you are attending to the bridge push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel. Or push any external sound off found on the bridge, whenever passing it. • Make sure to do this at an interval shorter than the alarm time.
2
When you hear the prewarning, immediately push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel or any external sound off found on the bridge. • If you fail to do so within the prewarning time, the alarm will sound in the designated areas on the ship.
276
312401/B
Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System
Figure 118 Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds
Figure 119
Alarm display, the timer has expired
7.2.2 How to turn the system on/off To turn the system on or off requires the superuser password.
312401/B
277
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)
2
Push the function key for ON (or OFF).
3
If requested, type in the password and push ENTER.
4
If you needed to type in the password, push the function key for ON (or OFF) again.
7.2.3 How to select backup navigator on duty Backup navigator on duty are person(s) assigned to investigate if the Bridge Watch Monitoring System Alarm sounds. Note
The alarm will always sound in the captains quarters. 1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)
2
Push the function key for the backup navigator(s) you want to assign.
3
Use the page down or page up to display all backup navigators. • Pushing the function key several times switches between selecting and not selecting the backup navigator.
7.2.4 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off To turn the system Auto-mode on or off requires the superuser password. Note
In Auto-mode, the system will automatically switch ON when the Autopilot is switched ON.
278
1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture.
2
Push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL).
312401/B
Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System
3
If requested type in the password and push ENTER.
4
If you needed to type in the password, push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL) again.
7.2.5 How to call for backup The system can be used to call for backup assistance at any time, even when the alarm interval has not expired. 1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)
2
Push the function key for Backup. • Audible and visual alarm indicators are activated.
3
To cancel the call push Backup again.
7.2.6 How to adjust system timers Changing system timers requires the superuser password. 1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)
2
Push ENTER. • The Tag Details View for the Bridge Watch Monitoring System is shown.
3
Use the navigator key to select Internal Check Time. • This is the time from the last push of any external sound off or Bridge Watch Monitoring panel key, until the alarm is given.
4
Push ENTER.
5
If requested, type in the password and push ENTER.
6
Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval.
7
Type in the new interval. • Allowable interval is between 3 and 12 minutes.
8
312401/B
Push ENTER.
279
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
9
Use the navigator key to select Last Stage Delay. • This is the interval between the alarm sounding in the captain and backup officers quarters, and the alarm sounding in the captain and all navigation officers quarters and public areas.
10 Push ENTER. 11 Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval. 12 Type in the new interval. • Allowable interval is between 0 and 3 minutes. 13 Push ENTER.
7.2.7 How to change between day and night viewing To set the display for day or night viewing do the following: 1
Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)
2
Push the function key for Day/Night. To change again push the key again. • For additional keyboard light and screen brightness settings, see “How to set keyboard and screen configuration” below.
7.2.8 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.
3
Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the item you want to change.
Colour Palette 4
280
Push ENTER.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System
5
Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select Day, Night or Dawn.
6
Push ENTER.
Keyboard Click 7
Push ENTER.
8
Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On or Off.
9
Push ENTER.
Keyboard Light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 11 Push ENTER. Screen Brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 13 Push ENTER.
7.2.9 How to change access level An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available as follows: 1
Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 3 to display the User Access menu. • The user access levels are displayed.
On: Indicates that access at this level is possible. Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.
312401/B
281
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
Only one user access level can be selected at a time. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information. • User: Allows (system) the operator to push sound off. • Superuser: Allows the operator to turn the Bridge Watch Monitoring System ON/OFF. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. Note
Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Note
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.
282
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
8 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 8.1 Overview This chapter explains how to use the process control system of the K-Chief 500 system. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station process control • Midi Operator Station process control
8.2 About the Process Control System The following types of equipment can be controlled by the K-Chief 500 Process Control System: • Pumps • Fans • Compressors • Valves • PID controllers
8.3 OS operational procedures 8.3.1 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions
To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping
312401/B
283
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Pump starter types
The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols
Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps, as shown below. One way, one speed pump
One way, two speed pump at low speed
One way, two speed pump at high speed
Pumps going revers Note
If the pump is a two way pump, the symbol arrow will change direction when it is sat to revers. The symbol for the one way, one speed pump may look the same as the symbol for the two way, one speed pump if it is going forward. The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the pump symbol to open the dialogue box. In the dialogue box it is written what kind of pump it is. And if it is for instance a two way pump, the dialogue box has radio buttons for revers and forward. Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of pump it is The symbol for the two way , one speed pump changes when it is sat to revers. Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol.
284
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Pump symbol colours
Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters
Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse.
312401/B
285
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Alarm and event enable
Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes
The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and manual. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. Single acting control
A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one way, one speed units only. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. Blackout
Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to Off at the running and remote feedback, and the delay to On for the system blackout signal.
286
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 120
Blackout sequence as described above
How to open the Pumps & Fans display
The Pumps & Fans display has a viewing of the most used pumps and fans in the system. It is possible to control the pumps and fans in this display, or they can be controlled from the other displays where they also are located. Where the pumps and fans can be found, and the number of pumps and fans in a system, vary according to the configuration. 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: Pumps & Fans. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (The name of the main group may vary according to the configuration.)
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: Pumps & Fans. • A display similar to the one underneath will be opened.
312401/B
287
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
The pumps may also be controlled on other displays where they also are located. How to start a pump
1
Open the display showing the pump and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.
2
Click on the START softbutton. • The pump symbol changes colour to green.
How to stop a pump
1
Open the display showing the pump and click on it.
2
Click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol changes colour to grey.
Note
Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. More functions are then displayed. To get access to the functions, click on the expand softbutton:
288
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
How to change the speed of a pump
1
Open the display showing the pump and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.
2
Click on the expand softbutton to make the rest of the options available.
3
Choose the wanted speed by clicking in the check box.
4
Click on the START softbutton
How to change the direction of a pump
1
Open the display showing the pump and click on it.
2
Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to more functions
3
Choose the wanted direction by clicking in the check box.
Note
When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable. How to reset a pump
The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure.
312401/B
1
Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem.
3
Open the display showing the pump.
289
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
4
Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to reset, and click on it. • The pump is selected and the circle around the pump starts flashing. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.
5
Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to the reset function
6
Click on the RESETsoftbutton. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey.
Stand-by pump systems
A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. The priority number defines which pump will start first. The one with the lowest number first. The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. When two pumps have the same stand-by number, both will start simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest number will start at group start.
290
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 121
Symbol for stand-by pump system
Stand-by system modes
The stand-by system can be set to one of two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Operator Station. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. Pumps can be manually operated. Note
Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. More functions are then displayed. To get access to the functions, click on the expand softbutton:
How to set a pump to auto or manual
1
Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.
2
Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing. • A similar dialogue is shown:
312401/B
291
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Push AUTO/MANUAL. • The controller changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).
How to start a stand-by pump system
To operate a pump system in stand-by mode both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. Do the following: 1
Select the display showing the stand-by pumps.
2
Move the cursor over the stand-by pump controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.
3
Click AUTO. • The text background turns green and the text changes to AUTO.
4
Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system, and click on them. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
5
Click on the AUTO softbutton, for all the pumps. • The pump status changes to AUTO.
6
When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over the pump you want to start, and click on it.
7
Click on the START softbutton. • The pump symbol turns green. • The pump status changes to Running, auto.
292
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
How to stop a stand-by pump system
This procedure shows you how to take a pump system out of stand-by mode, set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required. 1
Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.
2
Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.
3
Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to the reset function
4
Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • The text background turns grey. • The controller is set to manual. • The dialogue may look similar to the one underneath:
5
If the pump shall stop running, move the cursor over it, and click. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
6
Click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.
How to take a pump out of the stand-by system
To take a pump out of the stand-by system, set the pump to manual.
312401/B
293
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.
2
Move the cursor over the pump, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
3
Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • If the pump shall stop, click on the manual softbutton.
4
If you need to stop the pump, click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.
How to put a pump back into the stand-by system
1
Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.
2
Move the cursor over the pump, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
3
Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The pump status changes to AUTO.
4
If the pump do not start, click on the START softbutton.
How to handle a failure to a running pump
Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. • The pressure indicator turns red, indicating a drop in pressure. • The 1st stand-by pump starts. • The failing pump goes to MANUAL. It will keep on running or stop, dependent on how the system is configured. 1
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem.
How to set stand-by priority
A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps. This procedure shows how to set stand-by priority to a pump system with three pumps.
294
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
1
Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
2
Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to all the functions.
3
Click on the Master softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (1).
4
Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first stand-by, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
5
Click on the 1st stand-by softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (2).
6
Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next stand-by. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.
7
Click on the Next stand-by softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (3).
8.3.2 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions
To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping
312401/B
295
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Fan starter types
The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols
Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans, as shown below. One way, one speed fan
One way, two speed fan at low speed
One way, two speed fan at high speed
Fans going revers Note
If the fan is a two way fan, the symbol inside the circle (of the symbol) will change direction when it is sat to Exhaust. The symbol for the one way, one speed fan may look the same as the symbol for the two way, one speed fan if it is going forward. The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the fan symbol to open the dialogue box. In the dialogue box it is written what kind of fan it is. And if it is for instance a two way fan, the dialogue box has radio buttons for Exhaust (revers) and Supply (forward). Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of fan it is The symbol for the two way , one speed fan changes when it is sat to Exhaust (revers). Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol.
296
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Fan symbol colours
Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan
1
Open the display showing the fan.
2
Move the cursor over the fan, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing. • A dialogue similar to the one underneath is opened.
312401/B
297
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Click on the START softbutton. • The fan symbol turns green.
How to stop a fan
1
Open the display showing the fan.
2
Move the cursor over the fan, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing.
3
Click on the STOP softbutton. • The fan symbol turns grey.
How to reset a fan
The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped, or as the result of a start failure. 1
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem, if any.
3
Open the display showing the fan.
4
Move the cursor over the fan you want to reset, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing.
5
Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to all the functions.
6
Click on the RESET softbutton. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.
298
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
8.3.3 How to operate a compressor Purpose
The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal. Figure 122 sensor
A 2-compressor system with common pressure
The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions
To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Compressor control types
Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure
312401/B
299
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbol
To illustrate a compressor the following symbol is used: Figure 123
Compressor symbol
Compressor symbol colours
The compressor symbol has colours according to the state it is in. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system
A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. (It has also a symbol which shows if it is in auto or manual.) The compressor symbol is displayed above.
300
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 124
Leader follower compressor system
Priorities
For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows: • Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting, and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue pressure sensors, all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. Pressure tags
Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when the time has expired. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Start/stop conditions
Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. Start
312401/B
301
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit. • When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual. When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used, separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit • Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way disabled from operating. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. Figure 125
Leader start stop limit
Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.
302
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 126
Start 1st follower on pressure setting
Figure 127
Start two followers on pressure setting
Start follower after a time delay The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor. Figure 128
Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram
In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time delay. The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start immediately.
312401/B
303
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 129
Start followers after a time delay
The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3 times; start delay after the leader had its start condition. Figure 130
Followers start timers
In the illustration bellow, the followers are started after time delays. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and count the time from this event. Figure 131
Interrupted start timer
Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch
304
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 132
Built in hysteresis
By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit. Figure 133
Two analogue pressures
Overhaul function Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. • Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. How to set a compressor system to auto or manual mode
A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes:
312401/B
305
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station. Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1
Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system.
2
Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor controller symbol, and click on it. • The compressor controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.
3
Click on the AUTO or the MANUAL softbutton. • The controller changes between auto and manual. • The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).
How to start a leader follower compressor system
To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto. Then one of the compressors must be started. Note
When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will not start. 1
Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system.
2
Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol, and click on it. • The controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.
3
Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The text background turns green and the text changes to auto.
4
Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader follower system, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
306
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
5
Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The compressor status changes to auto.
6
Do the procedure from item 4 to 5 for each of the compressors.
7
When all of the compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to the compressor you want to start, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
8
Click on the AUTO softbutton.
9
Click on the START softbutton to start the compressor.
10 Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL, auto. How to stop a leader follower compressor system
To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode, set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required. 1
Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system.
2
Move the cursor over the controller symbol, and click on it. • The controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.
3
Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • The controller is set to manual.
4
To stop the running compressor, move the cursor over it and click. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
5
Click on the STOP softbutton. • The compressor symbol turns grey. • The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.
312401/B
307
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to set the leader follower priority
A stand-by compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. (In this procedure the system consist of three compressors) 1
Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system.
2
Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as leader, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
3
Click on the Master softbutton. • The text changes to leader.
4
Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the first follower, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
5
Click on the 1st standby softbutton. • The text changes to follower.
6
Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the second follower, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
7
Click on the Next standby softbutton. • The text changes to follower (2).
How to reset compressors
The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure.
308
1
Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem.
3
Open the display showing the compressor.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
4
Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
5
Click on the RESET softbutton. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.
8.3.4 How to operate valves Valve control functions
The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types
The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control • Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback • Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks • Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control • Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback • Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks
312401/B
309
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning • Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning • Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback • Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided. • One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks • Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks Valve symbols
Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves. Underneath is two examples: Figure 134
Valve symbol (example 1)
Figure 135
Valve symbol (example 2)
Valve symbol colours
Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid
310
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Note
As a default, valves will give an alarm on time-out - when not reaching the end position or setpoint. How to open on-off valves
1
Open the display showing the valve.
2
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.
3
Click on the OPEN softbutton. • The current status and the new command is displayed. • The symbol colour changes to green.
Note
Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. More functions are then displayed. To get access to the functions, click on the expand softbutton:
312401/B
311
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to close on-off valves
1
Open the display showing the valve.
2
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The valve is selected. The tag, tag description and the current state of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.
3
Click on the CLOSE softbutton. • The current status and the new command is displayed. • The symbol colour changes to grey.
How to operate analogue valves
1
Open the display showing the valve.
2
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed in a dialogue. (0 %; fully closed, 100 %; fully open).
3
Type in the new setpoint.
4
Push ENTER. • The valve setpoint is changed.
How to operate throttle valves
1
Open the display showing the valve.
2
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The equipment is selected. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
Open valve to 100 %
3
To open the valve to 100 %, use the trackball and click on the OPEN softbutton. • The status changes, first to opening then to opened.
312
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Close valve to 0 %
4
To close the valve to 0 %, use the trackball and click on the CLOSE softbutton. • The status changes, first to closing then to closed.
Throttle mode
5
To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100 %, use the trackball and click in the Throttle mode check box. • The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.
6
Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease softbutton, and click on it.
7
Type in the new setpoint value.
8
Push ENTER. • The setpoint changes.
How to reset valves
Resetting of valves is required on time-out. 1
Open the display showing the valve.
2
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The valve is selected. The tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.
3
Click on the RESET softbutton. • The symbol colour changes to grey.
8.3.5 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol
The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.
312401/B
313
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 136
PID controller
The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The controller operates when active. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual valve positioning is possible. Figure 137
PID controller symbol
PID controller symbol colours
• Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid
314
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
How to select a PID controller
1
Open the display showing the PID controller.
2
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate, and click on it. • The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is displayed around the controller.
Figure 138
Symbol for an active PID controller
How to activate the controller
1
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath is opened:
2
Click on the ON softbutton. • The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.
3
Click and enter a new setpoint in the dialogue . • The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed.
4
Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5
Push ENTER. • The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint.
312401/B
315
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to deactivate the controller
1
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and cick on it.
2
Click on the STOP softbutton. • The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed, but is showing N/A in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.
3
Click and enter a new actuator setpoint. • The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed.
4
Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5
Push ENTER. • The new actuator setpoint is displayed.
Note
You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value. Figure 139
PID controller symbol (not active)
8.4 MOS operational procedures Note
An access control system limits the possibility to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters to those who have the right password.
316
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
8.4.1 How to open Tag overview The Tag overview is a list where you can select the display picture you want to open. The display pictures are available for all controlled units. 1
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu.
3
Push 1 to display the Control Menu. • A list of alternatives are displayed. The list of groups may vary according to the system configuration.
Underneath is a list of groups and its number in parenthesis: • Pumps (1) • Compressors (2) • Valves (3) • Controllers (4) • Stand-by sets (5) Note
The contents of the list above may vary depending on the system configuration. 4
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to mark the wanted group. Then push enter to select it. It is also possible to select a group by using the numeric keys.
8.4.2 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions
To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout
312401/B
317
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Pump starter types
The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols
Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps, as shown below. One way, one speed pump
One way, two speed pump at low speed
One way, two speed pump at high speed
Two way, one speed pump going forward
Two way, one speed pump going in reverse
Two way, two speed pump going forward at low speed
Two way, two speed pump going forward at high speed
318
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at low speed
Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at high speed
Pump symbol colours
Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters
Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse
312401/B
319
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Alarm and event enable
Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes
The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and manual. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. Single acting control
A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one way, one speed units only. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. Blackout
Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. To solve this set the Offdelay, at the running and remote feedback, and the Ondelay, for the system blackout signal.
320
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 140
Blackout sequence as described above
How to start a one way one speed pump
1
Select the pump in the Tag Overview. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for START. • The pump symbol turns green. • The pump status changes to Running.
How to stop a one way one speed pump
1
Select the pump in the Tag Overview. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for STOP. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready, remote.
How to operate a two way and to speed pump Note
Depending on the system configuration, the text for the function keys may vary 1
Select the pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need.
3
Push the function key for the function you want.
Typical control texts:
312401/B
321
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Start Low Forward • Start High Forward • Start Low Revers • Start High Revers • Stop Note
When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable. How to reset a pump Note
This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure. 1
Push the Sound off button to turn the audible alarm off.
2
Select the display showing the pump.
3
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
4
Rectify the problem.
5
Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey.
Stand-by pump systems
A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. The priority number defines which pump will start first, and the one with the lowest number is first. The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. When two pumps have the same stand-by number, both will start simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest number will start at group start.
322
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 141
Symbol for a stand-by pump system
Stand-by system modes
The stand-by system have two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Midi Operator Station. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. Pumps can be manually operated. How to set the mode
1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for Auto or Manual. • The mode indicator changes between auto and manual. The ring around the pump symbol and the background colour for the mode indicator changes between yellow (auto) and grey (manual).
How to start a stand-by pump system
To operate a pump system in stand-by mode, both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system, must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. Do the following:
312401/B
323
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps, one at a time. • A white square is displayed around the pump.
3
Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.
4
Push the function key for AUTO. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto. • The ring around the pump symbol changes to yellow.
5
Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by pump system display.
6
Select each of the remaining pumps and set them to AUTO. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5.)
7
The stand-by pump system is set to AUTO. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto.
8
Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to start. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
9
Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.
10 Push the function key for START. • The pump starts. How to stop a stand-by pump system
To take a pump system out of stand-by mode, set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required.
324
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.).
2
Push the function key for MANUAL. • The stand-by pump system is set to Manual. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator grey and the text changes to Manual.
To stop the running pump do the following: 3
Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to stop. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
4
Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.
5
Push the function key for STOP. • The pump stops.
How to take a pump out of the stand-by system
To take a pump out of the stand-by system, set the pump to manual. 1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.) • If the stand-by pump system consists of only two pumps, the stand-by functionality can not be maintained.
2
If the pump system consists of only two pumps, push the function key for MANUAL. Otherwise go to step 3. • The stand-by pump system controller is set to Manual.
3
Use the navigator key to select the pump. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
4
Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.
312401/B
325
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Push the function key for MANUAL. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Manual.
6
Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by pump system. • The pump symbol is grey.
How to put a pump back into the stand-by system
1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.).
2
Use the navigator key to select the pump. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
3
Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.
4
Push the function key for AUTO. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto. • The ring around the pump symbol turns yellow.
5
Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by system display.
How to handle a failure to a running pump Note
This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. • The pressure indicator turns yellow, indicating a drop in pressure. • The 1st stand-by pump starts. • The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running or stop, depending on how the system is configured.
326
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
1
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem.
How to set stand-by priority
A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps. 1
Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview).
2
Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps, one at a time, to set their priority. • A white square is displayed around the pump.
3
Push ENTER to select it. • The pump is displayed.
4
You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need.
5
Push the corresponding function key to set the priority of the pump. • The number of priorities depends on the number of pumps, normally 2 or 3.
6
Push the ESC button, to return to the stand-by pump system display.
7
Select and set the priority for each pump as described above, until all priorities are set.
8.4.3 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions
To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded
312401/B
327
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Fan starter types
The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols
Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans. One way, one speed fan
One way, two speed fan at low speed
One way, two speed fan at high speed
Two way, one speed fan going forward
Two way, one speed fan going in reverse
Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed
328
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed
Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at low speed
Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at high speed
Fan symbol colours
Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan
1
Select the fan in the Tag overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for START. • The fan symbol turns green. • The fan status changes to Running.
312401/B
329
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to stop a fan
1
Select the fan in the Tag overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for STOP. • The fan symbol turns grey • The fan status changes to Ready, remote.
How to reset a fan Note
This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped, or as the result of a start failure. 1
Push the sound off button to turn of the audible alarm.
2
Open the display showing the fan.
3
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
4
Rectify the problem.
5
Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.
8.4.4 How to operate a compressor Purpose
The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.
330
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 142 sensor
A 2-compressor system with common pressure
The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions
To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Compressor control types
Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbols
Compressors have the following symbol;
312401/B
331
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 143
Compressor symbol
Compressor symbol colours
The compressor symbols have colour according to the state they are in. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system
A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. Figure 144
Leader follower compressor system
Priorities
For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows:
332
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
• Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting, and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue pressure sensors, all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. Pressure parameters
Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when this timer has expired. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Start/stop conditions
Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. Start Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit. • When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual. When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used, separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit
312401/B
333
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way disabled from operating. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. Figure 145
Leader start stop limit
Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting. Figure 146
Start 1st follower on pressure setting
Figure 147
Start two followers on pressure setting
Start follower after a time delay
334
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor. Figure 148
Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram
In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time delay. The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start immediately. Figure 149
Start followers after a time delay
The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3 times; start delay after the leader had its start condition. Figure 150
312401/B
Followers start timers
335
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
In the illustration bellow, the followers are started after time delays. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and count the time from this event. Figure 151
Interrupted start timer
Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch Figure 152
Built in hysteresis
By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one of the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit.
336
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 153
Two analogue pressures
Overhaul function Two reservoirs system have an overhaul function. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. • Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. How to set a compressor system to auto and manual mode
A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes: Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station. Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1
Select the leader follower compressor in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for AUTO or MANUAL. • The controller text changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).
How to start a leader follower compressor system
To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto.
312401/B
337
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will not start. 1
Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors, one at a time. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
3
Push the ENTER button. • The compressor is displayed.
4
Push the function key for AUTO. • The compressor controller for this compressor is set to Auto. • The ring around the compressor symbol changes to yellow.
5
Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the compressor system display.
6
Select each of the remaining compressors and set them to auto. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5)
7
Return to the compressor system display.
8
Push the function key for AUTO. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Auto. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto.
How to stop a leader follower compressor system
To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode, set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required.
338
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
1
Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for MANUAL. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Manual. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns grey and the text changes to Manual.
Do the following to stop the running compressor: 3
Use the navigator key to select the compressor. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
4
Push the ENTER button. • The compressor is displayed.
5
Push the function key for STOP. • The compressor is stopped.
How to set leader follower priority
A leader follower compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. 1
Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors, one at a time, to set their priority • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.
3
Push the ENTER button. • The compressor is displayed.
4
Push the page down key.
5
Push the corresponding function key to set this compressors priority. • The number of priorities depend on the number of compressors, normally 2 or 3.
312401/B
339
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
6
Push the ESC button to return to the display.
7
Select each of the remaining compressors until all priorities are set for all of them. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 6)
How to reset a compressor Note
This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure. 1
Push the sound off button to turn the audible alarm off.
2
Select the display showing the compressor.
3
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
4
Rectify the problem.
5
Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset.
6
Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.
8.4.5 How to operate a valve Valve control functions
The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status
340
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
• Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types
The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control – Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback – Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks – Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control – Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback – Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks – Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning – Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning – Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback – Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided. • One feedback: No control, one binary feedback • Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks Valve symbols
Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves.
312401/B
341
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 154
Valve symbol (example 1)
Figure 155
Valve symbol (example 2)
Valve symbol colours
The valve symbols have colour according to the state they are in. Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Note
As a default, valves will give an alarm on time-out - when not reaching the end position.
342
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
How to open an on-off valve
1
Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for OPEN. • The valve symbol turns green. • The valve status changes to Open.
How to close an on-off valve
1
Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for CLOSE. • The valve symbol turns grey. • The valve status changes to close .
How to operate an analogue valve
1
Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
Do the following to open the valve: 2
Push the function key for OPEN to 100 %.
Do the following to close the valve: 3
Push the function key for CLOSE to 0 %.
Do the following to position the valve to a setpoint: 4
Push the function key for SETPOINT 0-100 %. • A setpoint input window is displayed.
5
Use the CLR key to delete the existing setpoint
6
Type in the new setpoint.
7
Push the ENTER button. • The valve setpoint has changed • The valve is repositioned to reach the new setpoint.
312401/B
343
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to reset a valve
Resetting of valves is required on time-out. Do the following to reset: 1
Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.
2
Rectify the problem.
3
Select the display showing the valve.
4
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to reset.
5
Push the function key for RESET. • The valve symbol changes from red to grey.
8.4.6 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol
The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc. Figure 156
PID controller
The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The controller operates when active. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual valve positioning is possible.
344
312401/B
Operational procedures, Process Control System
Figure 157
PID controller symbol
PID controller symbol colours
• Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid How to activate the controller
1
Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for ON command. • The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.
3
Push the function key for ACTUATOR SETPOINT to enter a new set point. • A setpoint input window is displayed.
4
312401/B
Use the CLR key to remove the existing setpoint.
345
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Type in the new setpoint value.
6
Push the ENTER button. • The new setpoint is displayed. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint.
How to deactivate the controller
1
Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)
2
Push the function key for OFF Command . • The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed, but N/A is displayed in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.
Note
You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value. Figure 158
346
PID controller symbol (not active)
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
9 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9.1 Overview This chapter teaches you how to use the Power Management System (PMS) of the K-Chief 500 system. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station PMS control • Midi Operator Station PMS control
9.2 About the Power Management System Change-over functionality
Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change over functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standby diesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will then unload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected the diesel generator may continue running, cool-down and stop, or stop directly. This is dependent on the configuration. Automatic start and connect when blackout occurs
When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1st standby diesel generator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, the next standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possible to configure the system to start more than one standby generator on blackout. Load dependent start and stop of stand-by generators
When a high load occurs on the connected generator(s), the 1st standby generator will start and connect. When the load decreases enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the remaining, the 1st to stop generator will disconnect and stop. Control of heavy consumers start request and start granted
When a heavy consumer start request is received, the Power Management System will check for available power. • If enough power is available and a predefined number of generators are connected, the Power Management System gives a “start granted” to the consumer.
312401/B
347
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s) will automatically start and connect. When enough power is available, a “start granted” is given to the consumer. • When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request for start”, only one is granted at a time. The Power Management System remembers all start requests and enables them in sequence.
9.3 OS operational procedures 9.3.1 Overview The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ships power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical Power Management System display is shown below. Figure 159
348
Typical Power Management System Display
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
9.3.2 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) 1
Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.
2
Use the trackball, point, and click with the left button on the main group for the: PMS /Power Management System. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.
3
Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER MAN SYSTEM or PMS. • A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened. • Depending on the configuration, the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary.
9.3.3 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP) 1
2
Use the fingertip and touch the main group for the: PMS/Power Management System. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER
MAN SYSTEM or PMS
• A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened. • Depending on the configuration, the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary.
9.3.4 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker is called a generator set. (See Generator set symbol on page 350) The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set.
312401/B
349
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 160
Generator set symbol
• Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting
Circuit breaker symbol
• In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting
Generator symbol
(vs060229b)
Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped
Prime mover symbol
• Green: Running, ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping
Generator set information box
Each generator set has an information box containing the following information: Figure 161
Generator set information box
AUTO Connected 1st to stop (3)
Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto Operational state of the generator set Stand-by status information (priority in brackets) Low load auto stop blocked Fuel selection/load control selection
(vs060230)
350
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
How to display the control dialogue
1
Open the power management display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue may vary according to the system configuration. • The illustration below shows a maximum configuration.
Figure 162
Control dialogue for generator set with start/stop (maximum configuration)
Information field Connect the generator
Disconnect the generator Stop the generator
Start the generator
Turn on/off the load dependent stop function
Set the generator to auto mode
Set the generator to semi-auto mode
Give the generator a higher priority
Give the generator a lower priority
Heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic
Diesel oil only Load setpoint confirmation
Frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500
Frequency and load control by the governor (vs060223)
Reset alarm messages
The most common generator set configuration for a control dialogue with start/stop is shown in figure: Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop on page 352.
312401/B
351
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 163 Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop
Semi-auto mode
In Semi-auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the function keys (softbuttons). The function keys are used to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. Note
For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but the diesel will remain running. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system.
How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode)
1
Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed.
352
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
1
Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode)
1
Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected. 1
Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The text, cooling down, is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, click on the Stop softbutton twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting.
312401/B
353
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Note
For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool-down and stop. • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only. How to connect a generator (Auto mode) Note
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. Or it is running ready to connect. 1
Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode)
1
Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping.
354
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
• The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. 2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, click Stop twice.
How to stop a generator (Auto mode)
When the circuit breaker is connected: 1
Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. •
The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping.
• The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1
Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The text, cooling down, is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After a cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately without cooling down, click Stop twice.
How to start a generator (Auto mode)
1
Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
312401/B
355
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to stop block On/Off (Auto mode)
1
To block the load dependent stop function, click on the On softbutton. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. • Stop blocked is indicated in the generator set information box.
2
To activate the load dependent stop function, click on the Off softbutton • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.
How to prioritise the generators (higher/lower) (Auto mode)
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 1
Click on the Pri. Higher softbutton at the dialogue box, to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one.
2
Click on the Pri. Lower softbutton to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one.
How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change over logic (Auto mode)
1
Click on the HFO softbutton to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.
How to run the prime mover on diesel oil (DO) (Auto mode)
1
Click on the DO softbutton to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use.
356
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
How to select frequency and load control (Droop) by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode)
1
Click on the Droop softbutton to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve (static).
How to select frequency and load control (Isochron) by the governor (Auto mode)
1
Click on the Isochron (Isochronous) softbutton to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.
How to reset alarm messages (Auto mode)
1
Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.3.5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note
Applicable for i.a. shaft generators. How to display the control dialogue
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like.
312401/B
357
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 164 start/stop
Control dialogue for generator set without
How to connect the generator
1
Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
How to disconnect the generator
1
Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
How to reset alarm messages
1
Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
358
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
9.3.6 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint Note
Applicable for i.a. steam turbine generators. How to display the control dialogue
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like.
Figure 165 Control dialogue for generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint
How to connect the generator
1
Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
312401/B
359
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to disconnect the generator
1
Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
How to insert load setpoint
1
Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box (Load setp. (%)). And type in the new setpoint value.
2
Click on the OK softbutton. • The generator will change the load according to the new setpoint.
How to reset alarm messages
1
Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.3.7 How to operate the main switchboard controller Main switchboard controller symbols
The main switchboard is available with different layouts dependent on the system configuration. Underneath is three examples of how it may look like. Figure 166
Main switchboard controller, alternative 1 Available (spare) power
Frequency of generated power
Amount of power generated
Low load autostop blocked
(Vs060225)
Operational state (Red text indicates an alarm condition)
360
Status: Local/ Semi – Auto/Auto
Voltage of generated power
Symmetric/Asymmetric load sharing mode
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Figure 167
Main switchboard controller, alternative 2 Available (spar) power
(vs060226)
Frequency of generated power
Voltage of generated power
Figure 168
Amount of power generated
Main switchboard controller, alternative 3
(vs060227)
Available (spar) power
Operational state
How to display the control dialogue
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the main switchboard, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the main switchboard. • The illustration below shows the control dialogue, and what each of the softbuttons are used for.
312401/B
361
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Figure 169
Control dialogue for the main switchboard Busbar information field
(vs060224)
Load sharing and mode information field Symmetric load sharing Asymmetric load sharing Semi auto mode Resets alarm messages Auto mode
Auto mode
1
Click on the Auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the lowest priority number stops. • If a blackout situation occur, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • If a failure on a connected generator occurs, the generator with the highest priority starts. A change-over takes place.
Semi-Auto mode Note
This mode is used for commissioning purposes. Do not use for normal operation. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm. 1
Click on the Semi-auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in Semi-auto mode. • This will deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.
362
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Symmetric (Sym)
1
Click on the Sym softbutton for symmetric load sharing between the generators. • The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asymmetric (Asym)
1
Click on the Asym softbutton for asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. When more than two generators are connected, the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. – After an adjustable period of time, the task of running on high load, rotates between the generators.
How to reset the main switchboard
1
Click on the Reset softbutton to reset the main switchboard controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.
9.3.8 How to operate a bus-tie breaker Note
The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. How to display the control dialogue
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the bus-tie breaker, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the bus-tie breaker . This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured.
312401/B
363
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• The illustration below shows an example of how a control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker may look like. Figure 170
Control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker
How to connect
1
Click on the Connect softbutton. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected.
How to disconnect
1
Click on the Disconnect softbutton. • The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected.
How to reset
1
Click on the Reset softbutton to reset PMS any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.3.9 How to operate the one-touch auto sequence One-touch auto sequence controller symbol
On the Power Management System display is a dialogue which indicates the current state of the operation. Underneath is a figure which illustrates how the dialogue may look like.
364
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Figure 171 One-touch auto sequence symbol, indicating current state of operation
To simplify the Power Management System, one-touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined configurations by clicking on a softbutton. See How to display the control dialogue on page 365. How to display the control dialogue Note
The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. 1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )
2
Move the cursor to the one-touch auto sequence symbol, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the one-touch auto sequence . This dialogue will vary according to which of the one-touch auto sequences who are configured. • The illustration below shows what each of the softbuttons are used for.
Figure 172
One-touch auto sequence dialogue box
(vs060228)
Predefined modes
Abort the selected mode
Reset
312401/B
365
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to select modes
1
Click on the softbutton for the desired mode. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.
9.4 MOS operational procedures 9.4.1 User interface The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ship’s power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical Power Management System display is shown below. Figure 173
Typical Power Management System display
Note
Depending on the system configuration the appearance of the Midi Operator Station (MOS) display pictures may vary.
366
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
9.4.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller How to open the Power Management System display
1
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.
2
Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu. (Or display the Tag Selection Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, Tag Selection Menu, and push ENTER.)
3
Push 2 to display the PMS Menu. (Or display the PMS Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, PMS Menu, and push ENTER.)
4
Push 1 to display Tag Overview. (Or display the Tag Overview by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, Power Manager, and push ENTER.)
5
Push Enter and the Power Management System display will be shown.
How to open the main switchboard controller display
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.
2
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to mark the wanted switchboard.
3
Push Enter to select it. • A display showing the switchboard appears.
4
If the text, Enable commands, appear on the left side of the F4 function key, push the F4 function key to activate the functionality. • This is a password protection function
312401/B
367
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
5
Type inn the password. • The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371.) Figure 174
6
Typical main switchboard controller display
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the switchboard is configured.
7
Push the function key for the desired function.
The following functions are available: • Symmetric • Asymmetric • Connect more power (Connect more pwr) • Disconnect surplus power (Disconn surplus pwr) • Stop block on • Stop block off • Reset • Auto • Semi-auto Note
If there are more than four functions on the left side of the display, use the page up/page down keys to display them.
368
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Symmetric
1
Push the function key beside the text, Symmetric, for a symmetric load sharing between the generators. • The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asymmetric
1
Push the function key beside the text, Asymmetric, for an asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. When more than two generators are connected, the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. – After an adjustable period of time, the task of running on high load, rotates between the generators.
Reset
1
Push the function key beside the text, Reset, to reset the main switchboard controller when it is in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.
Auto mode
1
Push the function key beside the text, Auto, to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the highest priority will start. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the lowest priority will stop. • If a blackout situation occur, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • If a failure on a connected generator occurs, the generator with the highest priority starts. A change-over takes place.
312401/B
369
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Semi-auto mode Note
This mode is used for commissioning purposes. Do not use for normal operation. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm.
9.4.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen below) is called a generator set. The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set. Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 175
Generator set symbol
Circuit breaker symbol
Generator symbol
(vs060229b)
Prime mover symbol
• Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting • In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting Protection symbol: • Red dot: Protection alarm • Green: OK Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped • Green: Running, ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping
370
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
How to open the generator set control display
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.)
2
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3
Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set
4
If the text, Enable commands, appear on the left side of the F4 function key, push the F4 function key to activate the functionality. • This is a password protection function
5
Type inn the password. • The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371.)
Figure 176
6
Generator set with start stop control
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.
7
Push the function key for the desired function.
The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect
312401/B
371
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Reset • Start • Stop • Auto • Semi-auto • Stop block on • Stop block off • Pri. higher • Pri. lower • Load setpoint • HFO on • HFO off • Droop • Isochronous How to display detailed information
The following detailed information displays are available: • Generator frequency • Generator voltage • Generator current • Generator load • Generator relative load • Power factor 1
Open the generator set control display to select a generator set. (For information on opening the display see: How to open the generator set control display on page 371.)
• The detailed information can be found by selecting from the options shown to the left. And can be found on the left side of the generator set display.
2
372
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the option for the wanted information.
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
3
Push Enter to select. • A display showing the selected detailed display is opened. • Underneath is a figure showing a display of the frequency.
Figure 177
4
Frequency display
Push Enter once more to display a tag details view for this tag. • A display showing the tag details view is shown. The following figure is a tag details view of a frequency tag.
Figure 178
5
Tag details view for a frequency tag
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available information.
How to open the Generator Protection display
All marine generators must be protected according to the rules of the classification societies. By following the procedure underneath, the list of monitored functions will be displayed.
312401/B
373
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the text, Protection. (It can be located at the right side of the generator set symbol. See Generator set without start/stop on page 380)
2
Push Enter to select the Generator Protection display.
A list of monitored functions are displayed. These are: • Short Circuit • Over Current • Reverse Power • Diff. Current • Voltage • OverLoad • Frequency • VAr import/export Each of these is indicated by a coloured dot. The interpretation of the colours are: • Green dot: OK • Red dot: Alarm • Blue dot: Inhibited • Grey dot: Function not active • Orange dot: Invalid In addition to the list of monitored functions, the following information is available at the end of the list: • Current Measurement • Voltage Measurement • Frequency Measurement 1
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the function/information you want.
2
Push Enter to select.
Semi-auto mode
In Semi-auto mode the operator control the generator set using the function keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition.
374
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Note
For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator. But the diesel will remain running. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system.
How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Start. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode)
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed. 1
Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode)
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
312401/B
375
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1
Push the function key for Stop. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push the function key for Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. Note
For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool-down and stop. • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
How to connect a generator (Auto mode)
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. 1
Push the function key for Connect. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
376
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push the function key for Stop twice.
How to stop a generator (Auto mode)
When the circuit breaker is connected: 1
Push the function key for Stop. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. This is a direct stop without cooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1
Push the function key for Stop. • The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
2
312401/B
To stop the prime mover immediately, push Stop twice.
377
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to start a generator (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Start. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
Stop block On/Off (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load dependent stop function. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.
2
Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load dependent stop function. • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.
How to prioritize higher/lower (Pri. higher/lower) (Auto mode)
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 1
Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one.
2
Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one.
How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change-over logic (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for HFO (heavy fuel oil) to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.
378
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
How to run the prime mover only on diesel oil. (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use.
How to activate frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve.
How to activate frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Isochron (Isochronous) to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.
Reset (Auto mode)
1
Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.4.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note
Applicable for i.a. shaft generators. How to open the generator set display
312401/B
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.
2
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
379
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
3
Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set, and text for the function keys appear on the right side. (See figure Generator set without start/stop on page 380.)
Figure 179
4
Generator set without start/stop
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.
5
Push the function key for the desired function.
The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect • Reset Connect
1
Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
380
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
Disconnect
1
Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
1
Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.4.5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop, but with adjustable load setpoint Note
Applicable for i.a. steam turbine generators. How to open the generator set display
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.
2
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3
Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set, and text for the function keys appear on the right side.
4
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.
5
Push the function key for the desired function.
The following functions are available:
312401/B
381
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
• Connect • Disconnect • Load setp. • Reset Connect
1
Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
1
Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Load setp.
1
Push the function key for Load setp. (If the function key is not available, use the page up/page down keys to display it.) • A dialogue appears.
2
Use the alphanumeric keys to type inn the wanted value.
3
Push enter.
Reset
1
Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
9.4.6 How to operate a bus-tie breaker How to open the bus-tie breaker display Note
The bus-tie breaker display is project specific and may vary from the illustration below.
382
312401/B
Operational procedures, Power Management System
1
Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.
2
Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the bus tie breaker you want to control.
3
Push Enter to select the bus-tie breaker. • The display shows now the selected bus-tie breaker, and text for the function keys appear on the right side.
Figure 180
Bus-tie breaker display
4
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys.
5
Push the function key for the desired mode. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.
Connect
1
Push the function key for Connect. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected.
312401/B
383
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Disconnect
1
Push the function key for Disconnect. • The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected.
Reset
1
Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.
384
312401/B
Reference Guide
10 REFERENCE GUIDE 10.1 Overview This document gives an overview of parameters that can be inspected and adjusted from an Operator Station. Where applicable other parameter details are included. The following subjects are covered: • Overview of tag types • Alarm and monitoring parameters • Engineer’s safety
312401/B
385
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
10.2 Tag types Overview
The following is a list of available tag types in the K-Chief 500 system. Note
This is a general list of tags. Your system may therefore not have all the mentioned tags. A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a Distributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signal is physically connected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defines which application to run on the signal. Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module (RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4-20 mA. Basic tag types
386
Tag type number
Channel type
0
Undefined type
1
Voltage ± 0.1
2
Voltage ± 1
3
Voltage ± 5
4
Voltage ± 10
6
Voltage 0 - 1
7
Voltage 0 - 1
8
Voltage 0 - 5
9
Voltage 0 - 10
11
Milliamps ± 1
12
Milliamps ± 5
13
Milliamps ± 10
14
Milliamps ± 20
16
Milliamps 0 - 1
17
Milliamps 0 - 5
18
Milliamps 0 - 10
19
Milliamps 0 - 20
20
Milliamps 4 - 20
22
PT 50
23
PT 100
24
PT 1000
26
Potmeter 1 K
312401/B
Reference Guide
312401/B
Tag type number
Channel type
27
Potmeter 5 K
29
On-off without check (RAi-16)
30
On-off single check (RAi-16)
31
On-off double check (RAi-16)
32
RDi-32 digital input
34
Counter event
35
Counter frequency
36
Counter time
38
TC element
40
AC voltage 10 bit
41
AC current 10 bit
43
Generator frequency
44
Bus frequency
45
Phase difference
46
Cosine phi
47
Phase velocity
49
Pick up
128
Exhaust mean
129
Exhaust deviation
130
Rio PLC type
131
DO (digital out) 401 client
132
DOT (digital out) handler
133
AO (analogue out) 401 client
134
AO (analogue out) handler
135
Exhaust deviation limit
136
Alarm relay
137
Local alarm system
141
Rotating light handler
142
ASCII IO handler
143
SSC IO handler
144
DS 401 handler
150
Dead man handler
200
Serial AI
201
Serial DI
255
System tag handler
387
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Analogue output tags
Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the analogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unit type is a Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogue output channel types are available: Channel type number
Channel type
0
0 - 10.0 Volt
1
±10.0 Volt
2
0 - 5.0 Volt
3
±5.0 Volt
4
0 - 20.0 mA
5
4 - 20.0 mA
Relays
Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are automatically an output channel type.
388
312401/B
Reference Guide
10.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters 10.3.1 Analogue input tag items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Enable Gradient Alarm
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm Low Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Event Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event Low Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event High High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Gradient Block Limit
Number
Yes
Block if measured value is < block limit
Gradient Limit
Number
Yes
Gradient alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Filter Time
Number
Yes
Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Dead Band
Number
Yes
Report value dead band limit
Counts Low
Number
Yes
A/D minimum value
Counts High
Number
Yes
A/D maximum value
Eng. Units Low
Number
Yes
Instrument minimum value
Eng. Units High
Number
Yes
Instrument maximum value
Raw Value
Number
No
Measured raw value directly from ADC
Raw Percent Value
Number
No
Measured raw value in % of range
Scaled Value
Number
No
Measured value scaled to technical value
Filtered Value
Number
No
Filtered scaled value
Function
Some of the parameters are further explained below.
312401/B
389
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Enable alarms and events
Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the enable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable. Gradient parameters
The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In order to make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculated based on a moving average over the three last samples of the filtered value. When the process value falls below the block limit, the gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, the gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds the gradient limit. • Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the gradient alarm. • Gradient limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient value (in units/sec) exceeds this limit. Alarm and event limits
Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm and event limit has its own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, the alarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set, the corresponding status is cleared. The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four event limits. The alarm and event status is updated as following (if the enable flag is set): 1
LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit
2
L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit
3
H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit
4
HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit
5
Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit
6
Ev_2 = on, if Filtered_value > event_2 limit
7
Ev_3 = on, if Filtered_value > event_3 limit
8
Ev_4 = on, if Filtered_value > event_4 limit
The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm delay has expired. Filter time
The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaled process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant, which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. The time constant resolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter, hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant set to 0.1 seconds.
390
312401/B
Reference Guide
Dynamic dead band
The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the same number of decimals as specified for the process value. The dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag parameter is set to YES. This parameter is used for dynamic update of the process value for external tag users. When the process value becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the dynamic dead-band, a new value is sent. Scaling parameters
The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of technical values and measured values read from the analogue to digital converter. The technical sensor range is: Eng. Units High – Eng. Units Low The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low Figure 181
Scaling parameters
Measured values
Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter every 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in the range 0 to 65535 counts. Depending on the type of signal connected, the legal count range may be less. The table below shows the count range for the different signal types available:
312401/B
391
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Code
Short Text
Counts High
Counts Low
1
VOLT_PM_01
45874
19660
2
VOLT_PM_1
45874
19660
3
VOLT_PM_5
45874
19660
4
VOLT_PM_10
58981
6553
6
VOLT_0_01
45874
32767
7
VOLT_0_1
45874
32767
8
VOLT_0_5
45874
32767
9
VOLT_0_10
58981
32767
11
MA_PM_1
58981
6553
12
MA_PM_5
39321
26214
13
MA_PM_10
45874
19660
14
MA_PM_20
58981
6553
16
MA_0_1
58981
32767
17
MA_0_5
39321
32767
18
MA_0_10
45874
32767
19
MA_0_20
58981
32767
20
MA_4_20
58981
38010
22
PT_50
See 1)
See 1)
23
PT_100
See 1)
See 1)
24
PT_1000
See 1)
See 1)
26
POT_1K
See 2)
See 2)
27
POT_5K
See 2)
See 2)
1
The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on interpolation with values fetched from a pre-defined table. The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.
2
The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated based on a conversion algorithm. The count scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.
The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the analogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters the Scaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percent value is calculated (± 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.
392
312401/B
Reference Guide
10.3.2 Counter input tag items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Enable Alarm Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm Low Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Event Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event Low Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event High High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Limit Alarm Low Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event Low
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Limit Event High High
Number
Yes
Event limit
Filter Time
Number
Yes
Time in 100 milliseconds
Filter Index
Number
Yes
Counter input pin filter
Time Base
Number
Yes
Counting time code: ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr=3
Pulses Per Eng. Units
Number
Yes
Pulses per engineering unit
Raw Value
Number
No
Measured raw value directly from counter
Scaled Value
Number
No
Measured value scaled to technical value
Filtered Value
Number
No
Filtered scaled value
Dynamic Dead Band
Number
No
Report value dead band limit
Function
Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below. Counter input parameters Filter index
When using the counter as an event counter, it is possible to filter the counter input signal with a digital filter in order to avoid contact noise to be counted. The Filter index parameter specifies the digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.
312401/B
Filter index
Cut-off frequency
0
1 Hz
393
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Filter index
Cut-off frequency
1
5 Hz
2
10 Hz
3
50 Hz
4
100 Hz
5
500 Hz
6
Disabled
Time base
When using the counter for frequency or time measurements, the Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the measurement shall be calculated. The following values are available: Time base
Time unit
0
Milliseconds
1
Seconds
2
Minutes
3
Hours
Note
Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency mode. Pulses per Eng. Unit
When using the counter in frequency measurement mode, the scaling algorithm needs to know the number of pulses generated by the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified by the Pulses per Eng Unit parameter. Pulses per engineering unit is for instance: • 10 pulses per litre (flow rate) • 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM) • 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed) Counter input measured values Raw value
This value is read directly from the counter. In the event counting mode, this value is the same as the scaled value.
394
312401/B
Reference Guide
Scaled value
In the event counting mode, the Scaled value is the same as the raw value. In the frequency counting mode, the Scaled value is calculated from the raw value using the Pulses per Eng Units and the Time base parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter is used to calculate the Scaled value. Filtered value
The Scaled value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered value.
312401/B
395
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
10.3.3 Digital input tag items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
On delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 100 milliseconds
Off delay
Number
Yes
Delay in 100 milliseconds
Enable Alarm Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable alarm
Enable Event Low
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Enable Event High
Yes/no
Yes
Enable/disable event
Invert
Yes/no
Yes
Invert input status
Input value
Number
No
Input status before time delay
Delayed input
Number
No
Input status after time delay
Function
Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below. Digital input parameters Delays
Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must be stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time is specified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delay of 2 seconds. Invert
The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. Specify YES to invert the input signal. Input values
Input status both before and after time delay is available.
396
312401/B
Reference Guide
10.3.4 Exhaust mean value tag items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Mean Temperature High High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Enable Alarm High
Yes/no
Yes
Alarm enable/disable
Enable Alarm High High
Yes/no
Yes
Alarm enable/disable
Mean Temperature High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Mean Temperature Block
Number
Yes
Alarm blocking limit
Deviation Temperature High
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Deviation Temperature Low
Number
Yes
Alarm limit
Cylinder 1 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 2 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 3 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 4 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 5 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 6 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 7 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 8 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 9 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 10 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 11 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 12 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 13 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 14 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 15 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Cylinder 16 Temperature
Number
Yes
Temperature tag number reference
Dynamic Alarm Limit
Number
No
Deviation alarm limit
Mean Temperature
Number
No
Calculated mean temperature
Function
Exhaust mean value parameters Mean temperature high high/Enable alarm high high
If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the mean temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high high limit.
312401/B
397
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Mean temperature high
The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high limit. Dynamic deviation alarm limit
Alarm limit at current mean temperature. Mean temperature block/Deviation temperature high/Deviation temperature low
If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block limit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Deviation temperature low limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder, when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature block limit. The Deviation temperature high limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder, when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviation alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a graphical illustration of the different parameters.
398
312401/B
Reference Guide
Figure 182
Exhaust mean value parameters
Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature
The Cylinder (1–16) temperature parameters are tag number references for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Only the cylinder references that are in use, are used for calculating the mean temperature. Mean temperature
The Mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference parameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are not used in the calculation.
312401/B
399
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
10.3.5 Exhaust deviation tag items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Correction Temperature
Number
Yes
Correction temperature
Cylinder Temperature Reference
Number
Yes
This temperature tag number
Normalized Temperature
Number
No
Measured temperature + temperature correction
Function
There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder. This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean temperature tag item, and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range. Exhaust deviation parameters Correction temperature
Each cylinder’s Correction temperature is calculated only on request from the operator. This is normally done when the engine is running in steady state at 100 % load. The reason for using a correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal operating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the engine mean temperature. By adding the correction temperature to the real cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalised, so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. The correction temperature is calculated in the following way: Correction_temperature = Meantemp - RealCylindertemp
Cylinder temperature reference
The Cylinder temperature reference parameter is a tag number reference to the each cylinder’s temperature. Normalised temperature
The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way: Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp + Correction_temp
This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.
400
312401/B
Reference Guide
10.3.6 Common sub-menu items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Tag type
Number
Yes
RIO channel type
Decimal point
Number
Yes
Fixed point location for tag analogue value
External tag
Yes/no
No
Yes if tag is used by some other tag
Text
No
Tag’s global name
Tag name
Function
Common sub-menu parameters Tag type
The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is handled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available. Decimal point
Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value. The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423 and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly have decimal point 1. Tag name
The External tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by another module. Most control applications are external. The tag’s value will be automatically transmitted for external use. The Tag name parameter is the global tag name.
312401/B
401
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
10.3.7 Alarm sub-menu items Parameter name
Type
Adjustable
Alarm On Delay1
Number
Yes
High/low delay off (1 second)
Alarm Off Delay1
Number
Yes
High/low delay off (1 second)
Alarm On Delay2
Number
Yes
High high/low low delay off (1 second)
Alarm Off Delay2
Number
Yes
High high/low low delay off (1 second)
Inhibit On Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay on (1 second)
Inhibit Off Delay
Number
Yes
Inhibit delay off (1 second)
Inhibit Tag
Number
Yes
Tag number to inhibit this channel
Function
Alarm and inhibit delays
There are separate parameters for alarm delay On and Off, as well as delay of inhibit On and Off. When the condition for alarm or inhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must be stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new alarm condition is accepted, and an event is issued. Delays are specified in seconds. Inhibit parameters Tag number
Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tag number’s external parameter must be set to activate the Process Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes.
402
312401/B
Reference Guide
10.4 Engineer’s safety 10.4.1 Purpose The Engineer’s safety system (dead man system) is a system for engineer fitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by the engineer within a pre-defined time period. If not, the system will indicate “Engineer fitness alarm”.
10.4.2 Functions • Start, stop and reset from push-buttons • Control from the Operator Station • Warning light activated by relay • Alarm horn activated by relay • Range check of timers according to IMO rules When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expired time delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the system is not reset within a new time period, the system will activate an alarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typically be activated from the Operator Station by selected alarms when running an unattended engine room.
10.4.3 Local control The system is activated and de-activated manually by a key-switch. The system can also be activated automatically from the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during unattended engine room. A number of reset push-buttons are located around the ship.
10.4.4 Operator Station control When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the engineer safety handler is activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timers are not reset by the command from the Operator Station, if already running.
10.4.5 Parameters Parameter name
Type
Tag1: Start
Number
Yes
Start/on digital input Tag reference
N/A
Tag 1
Tag2: Stop
Number
Yes
Stop/off digital input Tag reference
N/A
Tag 2
Tag3: Reset
Number
Yes
Reset digital input Tag reference
N/A
Tag 3
312401/B
Adjustable
Function
Initial value
Parameter reference
403
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Parameter name
Type
Tag4: On Watch
Number
Yes
Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that someone is set on Watch
N/A
Tag 4
Tag5: New Alarm
Number
Yes
Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that a new alarm is activated
N/A
Tag 5
T1: Warning time
Number
Yes
Time from reset or start until warning is activated
20 min
P1
T2: Alarm time
Number
Yes
Time from warning is activated until alarm
150 s
P2
S1: IMO Compliant
Yes/no
Yes
Enable check timers according to IMO rules for machinery dead man system
Yes
B1
Adjustable
Function
Initial value
Parameter reference
Tags 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch Calling System at the Operator Station. The tag then pointed to by tag 4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set to bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tag pointed to by tag 5 will be activated, and this will activate the dead man handler in the same way as if tag 1 was activated. The decimal point is 0.
404
312401/B
Maintenance
11 MAINTENANCE 11.1 Introduction The on-board maintenance of the K-Chief 500 system involves both preventive and corrective maintenance. Due to the lack of moving parts, the maintenance actions performed by the operator is very limited. Only the preventive and corrective actions performed by the operator is described in this manual. This consists of the following: • Cleaning monitors, panels, cabinets, air filters etc. • Running on-line tests • Replacing fuses
312401/B
405
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
11.2 Preventive maintenance 11.2.1 Maintenance schedule Preventive maintenance routines must be performed regularly and effectively to ensure that the equipment is kept in top condition. Kongsberg Maritime recommends the following preventive maintenance schedule for the Alarm and Monitoring System: • Weekly – None. • 6-monthly – Check cables and cable entrances, electrical screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections. • Yearly – Check and, if necessary, calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Kongsberg Maritime recommends that the operation of each unit and its functions is checked after any major maintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing, testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure sensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance, we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the instruction given in the relevant maintenance manual. Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring points and of the alarm system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly to 6-monthly schedule.
11.2.2 Weekly maintenance This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will not interrupt normal system operation. Do the following: Operator Stations and Operator Panels
Each week, do the following for each Operator Station and Operator Panel: 1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water not too wet. Note
Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning solutions is not recommended as these may damage the unit.
406
312401/B
Maintenance
2
3
Push LAMP TEST. • All alarm groups and the system failure indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds. • If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. If the unit is fitted with an air filter, clean it. • If any additional preventive maintenance procedures are to be carried out, refer to the description in the relevant manufacturer’s manual.
Midi Operator Station
Each week, do the following for each Midi Operator Station: 1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display screen using a clean damp cloth. For heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water. Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Note
Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or alcohol. Watch Calling System
Each week, do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unit: 1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet. 2 Push LAMP TEST. 3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. The display (if any) should display configuration data. • If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. • If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent, replace the unit, as described in the relevant maintenance manual. Distributed Processing Units
This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. Hence, the Distributed Processing Units do not require weekly maintenance.
11.2.3 6–monthly maintenance Where applicable, check the following parts of the system each 6-months period: 1 Check cables and cable entrances for damage to the cable.
312401/B
407
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
2
Tighten all electrical screw terminals.
3
Tighten all plug connections.
11.2.4 Yearly maintenance Each year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. In general, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal is unchanged. Compare the input signal to this system, with the input signals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibrated in two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or by calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into the K-Chief 500. The calibration software is accessible from the Tag Details menu on the Operator Station, or from the Midi Operator Station when available.
408
312401/B
Maintenance
11.3 Corrective maintenance Corrective maintenance procedures must be performed to replace faulty parts in the event of a system malfunction. The corrective maintenance performed by the operator is limited to replacement of defective fuses. For all other corrective maintenance, refer to the K-Chief 500 Maintenance Manual or other relevant manufacturer’s manuals.
312401/B
409
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
11.4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) Note
The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, and for a specific project configuration the DPU models used will vary. The DPUs referred to in this section will therefore not always reflect the operator’s system.
11.4.1 How to handle DPU error codes All Distributed Processing Units have a Built-In Self-Test (BIST) functionality. These tests report errors to the Operator Stations on the system channel. The following table gives an overview of the error codes and gives appropriate actions to be taken: Error code
Error description
Action
49
RAM fail
Replace the module.
48
Transmitter overcurrent (RAi-16 and C1 modules)
Check all channels for high current load.
47
Fuse fail (RDi-32 and C1 modules)
Check all inputs.
46
CPU Board temperature high
Check the ambient temperature.
45
Configuration fail
Value = Config fail channel *64 + 45. Tag details gives detailed information.
44
dPSC link failure
dPSC only.
42
EEPROM read failure
C3 and C4 only.
41
Slave CPU application change-over
dPSC only. The Master CPU has most probably lost communication with one ore more of its local DPUs.
CAN 1 — plug X8 40
CAN controller bus off
39
CAN controller error status set
38
CAN controller overrun
37
Rx queue overrun
36
HP Tx queue overrun
35
LP Tx queue overrun
34
Transmit fault
Check CAN connections.
CAN 1 — plug X9
410
312401/B
Maintenance
Error code
Error description
Action
30
CAN controller bus off
Check CAN connections.
29
CAN controller error status set
28
CAN controller overrun
27
Rx queue overrun
26
HP Tx queue overrun
25
LP Tx queue overrun
24
Transmit fault
11.4.2 RIO-C3 7–segment display In independent systems without an external man-machine interface, a 7–segment display on the RIO-C3 Generator Protection module indicates trip information and status. Figure 183
RIO-C3 7–segment display
Use the following table to decode the 7–segment display on the module if a trip is activated: 1. digit = code for function
2. digit = code for phase
3. digit = code for level
0
Not used
0
No phase defined
0
No level defined
1
Short circuit
1
L1 or L1–L2
1
Level 1 or Low or (VAR) import
2
Overcurrent
2
L2 or L1–L3
2
Level 2 or Low Low
3
Reverse power
3
L3 or L2–L3
3
Level 3 or High or (VAR) export
312401/B
411
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
1. digit = code for function
2. digit = code for phase
3. digit = code for level
4
Differential current
4
Not used
4
Level 4 or High High
5
Voltage
5
Not used
5
Not used
6
Overload
6
Not used
6
Not used
7
Frequency
7
Not used
7
Not used
8
VAR
8
Not used
8
Not used
9
Not used
9
Not used
9
Not used
11.4.3 How to handle DPU communication errors If the Operator Station gives a communication error for one of the Distributed Processing Units, the LEDs on the front panel of the DPU in question must be checked. Figure 184
DPU front panel LED indicators (typical)
Power indicator
1
Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given.
2
Check the power LED indicator and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the table below.
Power mode
Power LED
Corrective actions
Power OK
Green
None.
412
312401/B
Maintenance
Power mode
Power LED
Corrective actions
Power with wrong polarity
Red
Correct the power polarity and check again. If the Power indicator is still red, replace the DPU.
No power
Dark
Check power supply and wiring. If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the DPU.
Fuse failure indicators
Analogue and digital inputs are protected by internal circuit breakers. Short-circuiting due to faulty sensors and/or damaged wires are indicated by the DPU. Note that these indicators are only available for the DPUs listed in this section. Indication of fuse failure can either be for multiple channels simultaneously (typically displayed by a LED mounted in the vicinity of the power LED) or for separate channels (displayed by the LED also giving channel status). See the tables below for details. 1
Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given.
2
Check the fuse failure indicator(s) and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the tables below.
Multiple channels Applicable for RDi-32 (digital channels 1 to 32), RIO-CI (digital channels 16-19) Channel mode
Fuse blown LED
Corrective actions
All channels are OK
Dark
None.
24 V to all digital channels is broken
Red
Isolate the fault by first pulling out one by one terminal block. After finding the relevant terminal block, unscrew wires for each sensor until the faulty sensor has been identified. Replace the sensor. If sensors with wiring are OK, replace the DPU.
Separate channels Applicable for RAi-16 (analogue channels 1 to 16), RIO-CI (analogue channels 12-15) Channel mode
Fuse blown LED
Corrective actions
Inactive channel
Dark
None.
24 V fuse is broken
Red
Disconnect 10–20 sec. If the sensor with wiring is OK, replace the DPU.
Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16), RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode
Fuse blown LED
Corrective actions
Inactive channel
Dark
None.
312401/B
413
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16), RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode
Fuse blown LED
Corrective actions
Active channel
Green
None.
24 V is broken
Red
Unscrew the sensor connected to the reported channel. Replace the sensor. If the sensor with wiring is OK, replace the DPU.
Status indicators
1
Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given.
2
Check each status LED indicator and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the table below.
Operational mode
Run LED
Watch Dog LED
Info. LED
End Init. LED
Corrective actions
Normal operation
Green
Dark
Flashing yellow
Green
The unit seems to be working OK. Check the cabling. Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. If the Operator Station is still reporting an error replace the DPU.
No application loaded
Dark
Red
Dark
Green
This indicates that the Distributed Processing Unit has boot software installed, but no basic software. Use the Rio load program to install the appropriate software.
Not initialised
Dark
Red
Dark
Dark
Return the item to Kongsberg Maritime.
Application stopped
Dark
Red
Dark
Green
Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the DPU.
414
312401/B
Index
A About password access MOS, 245 Access control, 78 Access control system CRP, 138 TCP, 201 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) description, 55 Alarm and event limits, 390 Alarm and inhibit delays, 402 Alarm and monitoring display, 77 Alarm and Monitoring System Access control system, 138, 201 Hhow to define the engineer qualifications, 221 Hhw to display system information, 137 how alarms are printed after a black-out, 116–117, 182 how to access the Watch Calling Configuration, 155, 218 how to acknowledge alarms, 116 how to call officers, 157, 219 how to change Deviation parameters, 152, 215 how to change list of tags in Selected Points group, 134, 197 how to change system time, 146, 209 how to change tag parameters for a channel, 148, 211 how to change time zone, 145, 208 how to configure Event Log, 132 how to configure the Autolog, 135, 199 how to configure the Event Log, 195 how to configure the Noonlog, 136, 199 how to customise the Favourites, 190 how to customize favourites, 126 how to define the engineer qualifications, 159
312401/B
how to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers, 160, 222 how to display alarm group information, 120, 184 how to display alarm history, 119, 183 how to display counters and reset counters, 121, 184 how to display offscan alarms, 121, 185 how to display system information, 145, 159, 200, 207, 221 how to handle alarm events, 115 how to lock and unlock the TCP, 180 how to make list of selected tags, 133, 196 how to override limitations to acknowledge alarms, 147, 210 how to override limitations to control pumps and valves, 147, 210 how to print Miscellaneous Logs, 127, 190 how to save screen dump, 125, 189 how to select the Watch Responsible location, 156, 218 how to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions, 122, 186 how to set the On Duty engineer, 155, 218 how to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer, 211 how to silence the CRP buzzer, 148 how to toggle between group and alarm display, 122, 186 Info field, 147, 210 Long trend display using CRP, 176 Long trend display using TCP, 238 Navigator image, 115
Operational procedures, MOS, 242 operational procedures, ShipViewer, 255 operational procedures, Watch calling system, 252 overview, 114 screen saver, 188 screen Saver, 124 Short trend display using CRP, 162 Short trend display using TCP, 224 system functions, 30 using the CRP, 115 using the TCP, 180 where to find Event Log display, 137 where to find the Event Log display, 200 Alarm detection, 27 Alarm sub-menu items, 402 Alarms, 27 display pages, 29 groups, 27 indication, 28 inhibit, 28 types, 27 ALC background light, 98 buttons and lamps, 97 buzzer, 98 panel layout, 97 temperature sensor, 99 Analogue input tag items, 389 Analogue output tags, 388
B Bar graphs, 77 Basic tag types, 386 Bearing Monitoring, 34 Bearing Wear ME monitoring, 263 Bearing Wear Monitoring, 35 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic ME monitoring, 264 BIST, 410 Boiler control, 44 Bridge watch alarms, 40 Bridge Watch Monitoring System How to adjust system timers, 279 How to call for backup, 279 How to change access level, 281
415
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to change between day and night viewing, 280 How to select backup navigator on duty, 278 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration, 280 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off, 278 How to turn the system on/off, 277 Normal use, 276 Operational procedures, 276 overview, 276 system functions, 40 Building blocks, 22 Built In Self-Test (BIST), 410
C Centralized operation, 25 Common sub-menu items, 401 Common sub-menu parameters, 401 Compressor control, 43 Control Room Panel (CRP) description, 53 Corrective maintenance, 409 Counter input measured values, 394 Counter input parameters, 393 Counter input tag items, 393 Counters, 31 CRP buttons and lamps, 91 buzzer, 94 display layout, 105 panel layout, 91 temperature sensor, 94 trackball, 94 Cylinder Liner ME monitoring, 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic ME monitoring, 272 Cylinder Liner Temperature, 37
Distributed Processing Units main characteristics, 63 DPU Digital Governor Unit (DGU), 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS), 72 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc), 64 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8), 66 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a), 65 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16), 66 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) description, 75 Dynamic alarm limits ME monitoring, 266 Dynamic dead band, 391
E Earthing, 24 Enable alarms and events, 390 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring, 30 Engine monitoring, 34 Engine overview mimic ME monitoring, 263 Engineer’s safety functions, 403 local control, 403 OS control, 403 parameters, 403 Exhaust deviation parameters, 400 Exhaust deviation tag items, 400 Exhaust mean value parameters, 397 Exhaust mean value tag items, 397 Explanation of displays ShipViewer, 257
D Decentralized system architecture, 23 Descriptions units, 50 Design principles, 22 Diagnostics, 78 Digital input parameters, 396 Digital input tag items, 396 Display layout, 79
416
F Filter time, 390 Fuel performance system, 30
G Gateways, 74 Generator control, 46
Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) description, 70 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) description, 69 Getting started, 90 Using the ALC, 97 using the CRP, 91 Using the INP, 100 using the MOS, 103 Using the TCP, 95 Gradient parameters, 390
H Hard copy, 78 How alarms are printed after a black-out CRP, 116–117 TCP, 182 How to accept watch responsibility Watch calling system, 253 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration CRP, 155 TCP, 218 How to acknowledge alarms CRP, 116 How to adjust system timers BWMS, 279 How to call for backup BWMS, 279 How to call officers CRP, 157 TCP, 219 How to call the ON DUTY engineer Watch calling system, 252 How to change access level BWMS, 281 How to change alarm delay MOS, 251 How to change alarm limits MOS, 251 How to change between day and night viewing BWMS, 280 How to change Deviation parameters CRP, 152 TCP, 215 How to change list of tags in Selected Points group CRP, 134
312401/B
Index
TCP, 197 How to change system time CRP, 146 TCP, 209 How to change tag parameters MOS, 247 How to change tag parameters for a channel CRP, 148 TCP, 211 How to change time zone CRP, 145 TCP, 208 How to configure Event Log CRP, 132 How to configure the Autolog CRP, 135 TCP, 199 How to configure the Event Log TCP, 195 How to configure the Noonlog CRP, 136 TCP, 199 How to customise the Favourites TCP, 190 How to customize favourites CRP, 126 How to define the engineer qualifications CRP, 159 TCP, 221 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers CRP, 160 TCP, 222 How to display alarm group information CRP, 120 MOS, 243 TCP, 184 How to display alarm history CRP, 119 MOS, 242 TCP, 183 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode Watch calling system, 253
312401/B
How to display alarm summary MOS, 243 How to display counters and reset counters CRP, 121 TCP, 184 How to display information about DPUs MOS, 246 How to display mimic pictures MOS, 317 How to display offscan alarms CRP, 121 TCP, 185 How to display system information CRP, 137, 145, 159 TCP, 200, 207, 221 How to handle alarm events CRP, 115 MOS, 242 How to lock and unlock the TCP, 180 How to make list of selected tags CRP, 133 TCP, 196 How to open or close valves OS, 309 How to operate a compressor MOS, 330 OS, 299 How to operate a fan starter MOS, 327 OS, 295 How to operate a PID controller MOS, 344 OS, 313 How to operate a pump starter MOS, 317 OS, 283 How to operate valves MOS, 340 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms CRP, 147 TCP, 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves
CRP, 147 TCP, 210 How to print displayed information ShipViewer, 260 How to print Miscellaneous Logs CRP, 127 TCP, 190 How to receive a call Watch calling system, 252 How to respond to alarms Watch calling system, 252 How to save screen dump CRP, 125 TCP, 189 How to save ShipViewer images, 261 How to select backup navigator on duty BWMS, 278 How to select the Watch Responsible location CRP, 156 TCP, 218 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions CRP, 122 TCP, 186 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration BWMS, 280 How to set the On Duty engineer CRP, 155 TCP, 218 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer TCP, 211 How to silence the CRP buzzer CRP, 148 How to toggle between group and alarm display CRP, 122 TCP, 186 How to transfer watch responsibility Watch calling system, 252 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off BWMS, 278 How to turn the system on/off BWMS, 277 How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters ME monitoring, 266
417
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters ME monitoring, 273 How to view saved mimic diagram files ShipViewer, 261
I Image types, 79 Indicators Fuse failure, 413 Power, 412 Status, 414 Info field CRP, 147 TCP, 210 Inhibit parameters, 402 INP background light, 102 buttons and lamps, 100 panel layout, 100 temperature sensor, 102 trackball, 101 Input Panel (INP) description, 54 Introduction, 15
K Keyboard and screen configuration MOS, 244
L List image, 80 Logging, 78 Long trend display using CRP, 176 Long trend display using TCP, 238 Long Trend Logging ME monitoring, 269
M Main Bearing temperature, 37 Main functions ShipViewer, 255 Maintenance, 405 BIST, 410 corrective, 409 preventive, 406 Preventive 6–monthly, 407 Maintenance Plan, 406
418
schedule, 406 yearly, 408 weekly, 406 ME monitoring Bearing Wear, 263 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic, 264 Cylinder Liner, 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic , 272 Dynamic alarm limits, 266 Engine overview mimic, 263 how to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters, 266 how to use fluctuate monitoring parameters , 273 Long Trend Logging, 269 operational procedures, ME monitoring, 263 overview mimic, 263 Sensor System Failure, 268 Short Trend Alarm Logging, 270 System overview mimic, 265 Measured values, 391 MetaPower torque monitoring, 39 Midi Operator Station description, 52 Monitoring image, 83 MOS about password access, 245 how to change alarm delay, 251 how to change alarm limits, 251 how to change tag parameters, 247 how to display alarm group information, 243 how to display alarm history, 242 how to display alarm summary, 243 how to display information about DPUs, 246 how to handle alarm events, 242 keyboard and screen configuration, 244 keyboard layout, 103 menus, 106 Multiple Serial Interface (MSI 12)
description, 71
N Navigator, 86 Navigator image CRP, 115 Normal use of the BWMS, 276
O Operational procedures AMS, MOS, 242 AMS, ShipViewer, 255 AMS, Watch calling system, 252 BWMS, 276 PCS, MOS, 316 PCS, OS, 283 PMS, MOS, 366 PMS, OS, 348 Operator functions, 77 Operator maintenance, 405 Operator Panels descriptions, 51 getting started, 90 Operator Station description, 51 Operator Stations descriptions, 51 getting started, 90 Overview mimic ME monitoring, 263
P PDF viewer, 85 PID controllers, 43 Power Management System operate bus-tie breaker, 382 operate generator set with start/stop control, 370 operate generator set without start/stop control, 379 operate generator set without start/stop control, with adjustable set-point, 381 operate main switchboard controller , 367 operational procedures, MOS, 366 Operational procedures, OS, 348 overview, 347
312401/B
Index
system functions, 45 user inter face, 366 Preventive maintenance, 406 Process Control System How to display mimic pictures, 317 How to open or close valves, 309 How to operate a compressor, 299, 330 How to operate a fan starter, 295, 327 How to operate a PID controller, 313, 344 How to operate a pump starter, 283, 317 How to operate valves, 340 Operational procedures, MOS, 316 Operational procedures, OS, 283 overview, 283 system functions, 41 Process image, 80 Process mimics, 77 Purifier control, 43 Purpose, this manual, 15
R Reference guide, 385 alarm and monitoring parameters, 389 engineer’s safety, 403 tag types, 386 Relays, 388 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16) description, 64 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) description, 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) description, 68 RIO, 69 RIO-C3 7–segment display troubleshooting, 411 Rules safety, 17 Running hours, 31
S Safety general rules, 17 Scaling parameters, 391 Screen saver TCP, 188
312401/B
Screen Saver CRP, 124 Scuffing, 38 Self-checking, 78 Sensor System Failure ME monitoring, 268 Sentry, 36 Shaft generator, 47 Ship Viewer, 89 ShipViewer Explanation of displays, 257 how to print displayed information, 260 how to save ShipViewer images, 261 how to view saved mimic diagram files, 261 main functions , 255 understanding the ShipViewer display, 255 Short Trend Alarm Logging ME monitoring, 270 Short trend display using CRP, 162 Short trend display using TCP, 224 Stand-by pumps, 41 Status displays, 77 System architecture, 23 System components, 22 System configuration image, 84 System description architecture, 23 building blocks, 22 design principles, 22 DPUs, 63 gateways, 74 operation, 25 system overview, 18 Watch Calling, 58 System diagrams, 20 System Gateway (SGW), 74 System images display and control, 87 display layout, 79 image layout, 79 list image, 80 monitoring image, 83 Navigator, 86 PDF viewer, 85 process image, 80 Ship Viewer, 89 system configuration image, 84 trend image, 82
System interfaces, 19 System overview, 18 System overview mimic ME monitoring, 265
T Tank display, 32 TCP Alarm Navigator, 95 Graphic Display Navigator, 96 panel layout, 95 Touch Control Panel (TCP) description, 56 Trend image, 82 Trend monitoring, 30 Troubleshooting DPU communication errors, 412 DPU error codes, 410 RIO-C3, 411
U Understanding the ShipViewer display, 255 Unit descriptions, 50 User interface, 77 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC), 97 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP), 91 Using the Input Panel (INP), 100 Using the Midi Operator Station (MOS), 103 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP), 95
V Valve control, 42 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) description, 73
W Watch Bridge Unit using the WBU, 107 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) description, 59 Watch Cabin Unit using the WCU, 110 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) description, 60 Watch calling system
419
Kongsberg K-Chief 500
how to accept watch responsibility, 253 how to call the ON DUTY engineer, 252 how to display alarm information when in off duty mode, 253 how to receive a call, 252 how to respond to alarms, 252 how to transfer watch responsibility, 252 Watch Calling system, 58 Water in oil detection, 38 WBU adjust illumination, 109 panel layout, LCD, 108 panel layout, LED, 109 test panel, 110 WCU adjust illumination, 113 panel layout, LCD, 111 panel layout, LED, 112 respond to alarms, 112 test panel, 113 Weekly maintenance, 406 Where to find Event Log display CRP, 137 Where to find the Event Log display TCP, 200 Wireless temperature monitoring, 36
420
312401/B
Index
312401/B
421
©2008
Kongsberg Maritime
Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway
Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com